Home

TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual

1. HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 59 94 50 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 59 94 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 Output Format 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97psf30psf Output sample structure YCbCr 4 4 4 12b 10b Not available YCbCr 4 2 2 12b 10b X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b 10b Not available GBR A 10b Table 3 31 HD3G7 Converter mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 59 94 50 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 59 94 60 2398 24 25 29 97 30 Output Format 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97psf30psf Output sample structure YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X YCbCr A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBRtA 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 148 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Table 3 32 HD3G7 Converter mode 3G Level B 2xHD 1920 x 1080 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf 59 94 50 60 23 98 24 25 29 97 30 50 59 94 60 2398 24 25 29 97 30 Output Format 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf24psf 25psf 29 97ps
2. Locked gt gt gt Locked gt gt gt gt 10 Locked gt gt gt gt gt 11 Locked gt gt gt gt gt gt ONDA WN O co Figure 3 61 GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu ANTENNA POWER The ANTENNA connector on the rear panel can supply DC power for a connected GPS antenna Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the following antenna power settings CAUTION To avoid antenna damage do not turn on the DC antenna power until you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage Antenna damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select OFF No power is supplied to the GPS antenna 3 3 V Supplies 3 3 V DC to power the GPS antenna m 5V Supplies 5 V DC to power the GPS antenna 3 124 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module When the ANTENNA connector is configured to provide power to the antenna the rear panel POWER indicator lights as follows Blinks green to indicate an open circuit This occurs if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used m Displays solid red if the connected antenna is shorted A shorted antenna will not damage the GPS7 module If a splitter is used on the antenna it may appear as a short at DC but still pass through the RF signal which
3. H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator OVERLAY Submenu Use this menu to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down VY arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu ENTER HDVG7 x OVERLAY OBJECT Logo To LOGO submenu Logo lt gt ID Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle CANCEL To CIRCLE submenu OFF HDVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK A Figure 3 103 HDVG7 module OVERLAY subme
4. NO Black 2 YES output only Figure 3 57 GPS7 module BLACK submenu INPUT OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button configure the BLACK 1 connector as an INPUT or an OUTPUT This connector is forced to be an input if the TIMING REFERENCE SOURCE is set to a Genlock signal or if VITC is the TIME OF DAY reference NOTE Ifa reference signal is connected to the BLACK I REF IN connector you should configure this connector as an input so that the GPS7 module does not output a video signal if the Reference Source is changed to GPS or internal This might occur when using the GPS7 module in a dual configuration where the module is being switched between being a slave via genlock to incoming video or a master source using the GPS reference NOTE This submenu is available only when BLACK 1 is selected for configuration and the module has the BLACK 1 REF IN connector TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 119 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module SELECT FORMAT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select from the signal formats in the following table Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Table 3 18 GPS7 module output signal formats NTSC NTSC No Setup PAL 1080 60i 1080 59 94 1080 50i 1080 24sf 1080 23 98sf 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 50p CW 10 MHz 1 The CW 10 MHz
5. AVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Random Disable Figure 3 18 AVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu H step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 60 to 60 in 4 sample steps V step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 15 to 15 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator OVERLAY Submenu Use this menu to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu ENTER AVG x OVERLAY OBJECT Logo To LOGO submenu Logo ID Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle CANCEL To CIRCLE submenu OFF AVG7 x
6. Enable lt gt Disable To GPI ALARM SELECT Submenu page 3 27 CANCEL Disable BLACK 1 lt gt BLACK 2 BLACK 3 To AGL7 ALARM SELECT Submenu page 3 28 i a a e aa a 1970 188 Figure 2 31 Mainframe GPI ALARM menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics The ALARM menu contains the following selections ALARM STATUS Displays the alarm status detected inside the instrument The following status messages may be displayed No Alarm No errors have been detected Genlock Near Loss of Lock The frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference signal have shifted considerably and the TG700 is near loss of lock If this message appears check the frequency of the genlock signal or the internal reference signal of the TG700 Genlock Loss of Lock The TG700 cannot lock to the genlock signal Genlock No Signal A genlock signal is not connected Fan Fault The fan on the rear panel has stopped working NOTE In the alarm status display the instrument displays an error message that has been detected in the past In order to refresh the display you need to access another menu item press the CANCEL button and then reselect the ALARM STATUS menu item m ALARM RESET Resets the alarm status The TG700 holds the alarm status even if the cause of the alarm is eliminated Use this menu item when you need to reset the status If the cause of the error is n
7. Figure 3 62 GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the timecode reference Internal If Internal is selected then the time can be set manually like setting any clock Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit The date and time digits take the following form YYYY MM DD HH MM SS NOTE Selecting Internal applies the start time and date Typically this causes a disruption to the syncs so care should be taken to verify the date and time are correct before selecting Internal mode 3 126 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module VITC Input Selects the vertical interval time code as the timecode reference VITC is only available when the Reference Source is set to a video Genlock signal NOTE VITC input is not available on earlier GPS7 modules that do not have the REF IN input connector GPS Signal If GPS Signal is selected the time from the GPS receiver is used to derive the time of day This selection is only available if GPS Signal is the selected Reference Source Mode When VITC is the Timecode Source Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the synchronization mode Follow The time of day follows the VITC on the inpu
8. 3 22 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual SELECT SIGNAL Submenu ATG x BLACK 1 NTSC Black Burst lt gt ATG7 Analog Test Generator TIMING Sets the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 26 ID TEXT Sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the BARS connector Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the ID TEXT submenu See page 3 24 Use this menu to select an output signal for the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BARS connector The following figure shows the SELECT SIGNAL submenu m BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 m BARS NTSC and NTSC No Setup NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst with Field REF Composite Sync 100 Color Bar Composite Blanking 75 Color Bar Subcarrier SMPTE Color Bar H Drive 40 Flat Field V Drive Other 1 Field Reference Other 2 PAL PAL Black Burst Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF Black Burst No Field REF Composite Sync 100 Color Bar Composite Blanking 75 Color Bar Subcarrier 100 Color Bar Over Red H Drive 75 Color Bar Over Red V Drive 40 Flat Field Field Reference Other 1 PAL Pulse Other 2 Figure 3 12 ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to scroll through the selections Press the ENTER button to ena
9. arrow button to select PAL d Press the ENTER button e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black Burst f Press the ENTER button g Press the CANCEL button to exit the PAL submenu Check that the WFM7120 shows PAL on the reference input Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 24p Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM7120 shows 1080 24p on the reference input Press the CANCEL button to exit the Select Formats menu Black output VITC 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the module to the CMPST A input on the WFM7120 and terminate the loop through with a 75 Q terminator Activate the input by pressing the C input button on the front panel of the monitor On the WFM7120 press the CONFIG button and select VITC as the timecode source On the TG700 press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears Use the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Black 1 Press the ENTER button Use the up A or down Y arrow button to SELECT FORMAT Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select button to select NTSC Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black Burst TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 29 Getting Started 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
10. AWVG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Check Generator module is functional Required equipment HDTV waveform monitor Three 75 Q BNC cables m Three 75 Q terminators Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 main menu shown below appears AVWG7 x STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars 6 1 20 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a format then press the ENTER button TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Getting Started Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal Use the 75 Q BNC cables to connect the upper or lower CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors to the CH A CH B and CH C inputs of the waveform monitor respectively Use the 75 Q terminators to terminate the other loop through connectors on the waveform monitor real panel Press the CH A button on the waveform monitor and set the waveform monitor to view the signal Check that the signal ap
11. Checkerboard 4x4 grid of alternating black and white patches used to measure intra frame contrast per 6 8 of SMPTE SMPTE EG 432 1 2007 Production Aperture Includes single pixel wide lines at the extreme edges of the active video area marking the complete production aperture Vertical lines are implemented as single sample pulses with no edge filtering so this pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal Clean Aperture Grid pattern per SMPTE RP 187 1995 The clean aperture is marked by the outer markers with overscan markers at approximate 2 5 increments The center 4 3 section of a 16 9 image has an additional set of aperture and overscan markers Each line on the grid is implemented with two horizontal lines or a double width pulse centered on two samples because the actual aperture boundary and the center of the image each lie midway between lines and samples Convergence Grid pattern of equal size squares with a dot at the center of each square Each line and dot is implemented as a single horizontal line or single sample pulse This pattern is used to verify convergence of RGB channels and no color fringing should be visible on the white lines and dots when the channels are aligned 3 154 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Table 3 33 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description PULS
12. HDLG7 x STATUS CONVERTER Normal 1080 60i GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits CONVERTER Normal Indicates that the incoming HD SDI video stream is being converted in a normal mode The other choice is Y to GBR where the incoming Y data is placed on the G B and R channels on the output Y to GBR is only selectable in the GBR sampling structure 1080 60i Indicates the incoming signal format If there is no input or the format is not the correct rate the following messages will appear on the second line of the LCD No Input Signal or Input Signal Error Check FORMAT GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure Generator Mode The figure below shows an example STATUS display when the module is in the generator mode HDLG x STATUS 100 Color Bars 1080 24sF GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 100 Color Bars Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated As different generator signal is selected its name will be displayed 1080 24sF Indicates the output format GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH Selects the sampling structure and pixel depth of the output signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the formats listed in the table below Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Table 3 39 HDLG7 module sample structure depth signal formats 1920 x 1080 formats 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 GBR 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 GBR A 4 4 4 10 b
13. Press the ENTER button Press the CANCEL button to exit the NTSC submenu Use the up A or down arrow button to select Timecode Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Time of Day as the Timecode Source Press the ENTER button Use the up A arrow to select the VITC submenu and press the ENTER button to select VITC 1 Press the right arrow to select Output Enable Press the ENTER button Use the down arrow to select Line number Press the left lt 4 arrow to select Line number 14 Check that the time of day is correctly updating on the WFM7120 Timecode display Repeat the procedure for Black 2 and Black 3 signals LTC output 1 Connect the LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC GPI DSUB on the back of the GPS7 module Construct an adapter by soldering wires between a female XLR and a 9 pin DSUB male header with solder cups with this pin out a XLR pin to DSUB pin 1 b XLR pin 2 to DSUB pin 2 c XLR pin 3 to DSUB pin 3 Connect the LTC 1 output on the breakout cable to the XLR adapter you just made Connect the DSUB end of the adapter you just made to the remote connector on the WFM7120 Configure the WFM7120 to use LTC as the Timecode source TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started 6 Configure the LTC 1 output of the GPS7 module for 30 fps drop frame a b c h i j Press the MODU
14. Select the Test Signal To output a signal from the DVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the DVG7 module main menu appears as shown below DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows DVG7 x SELECT FORMAT 525 270 Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press CANCEL press the CANCEL button All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the DVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 41 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator Use the left
15. cece cence reorit iE een EEE e ne ent EEE een E Ea 2 21 Figure 2 19 FRAME RESET STATUS submenu c ccc ece cence eee eee ee een ee ene e ene ene ees 2 22 Figure 2 20 UTILITY submen 2 0 ccc cissensvecedndadadacersedenne ences sone endeedeetesdeereeaauosmmaens bos 2 23 Figure 2 21 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu 0 ceceecee cence ene ee eee e ee eedeeneeeenneeeneas 2 25 Figure 2 22 NETWORK INFORMATION submenu 0ceeceeeeee cece eens eneeeeeneeeeees 2 26 Figure 2 23 NETWORK SETUP submenu ccc cece cece eee eee eee eee eee ene e ne enene ene eea 2 27 Figure 2 24 DIAGNOSTICS submenu ccc cee cc eee eee eee ence eee eeeeeeeeneeeaeeneneeeeaeeeens 2 29 Figure 2 25 Internal frequency calibration Menu 6 cece eee e cence cnet ee tee eae eaeeneeneeeeees 2 30 Figure 2 26 Gain calibration Menu 00 ce cece ence nee ee eee e cece ence eeeeenetee ee enenneenaeeeees 2 30 Figure 2 27 Pin connections for a 1 OBASE T crossover Ethernet cable 00s ccece eee e eee ees 2 31 Figure 2 28 Top cover removal 0 cceccece eee e cee ne ence teens eee eae ene ene eeeenenee ee enenneenaeeeens 2 34 Figure 2 29 Location of the mainframe GPI connectors on the A10 MAIN board 4 2 34 Figure 2 30 Applying the mainframe GPI label to the rear panel 00s cece eee ence ee eee teens 2 35 Figure 2 31 Mainframe GPI ALARM menu 0
16. gt Select field structure Field 2 Line 9 HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Sample Offset 1928 HANC lt gt Set sample offset HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Video Channel Luma lt gt Select Luma or Chroma HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Link Location LinkA lt gt Select Link A or Link B HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD z Stream Location HD Stream 1 Select HD Stream 1 or HD Stream 2 Progressive formats only 2 Interlaced formats only 3 3G B and DL formats only 4 OSH formats only 1970 225 Figure 3 92 Ancillary Payload submenu Continued 3 188 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Output Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between Disable Continuous and Single Packet Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Parity Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Automatic and Manual parity Automatic parity is an 8 bit mode while Manual parity allows 10 bits Ifa 10 bit word is entered while in manual parity and the module is later set to automatic parity the correct 8 bits will be sent The entire 10 bit word is in system memory though so if the module is then reset to manual parity the entire 10 bit word entered by the user will be transmitted DID Press the ENTER button to edit the Data ID word You can set the Data ID from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to Ox3FF in 10 bit mode Use
17. 4 or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the JAM SYNC submenu Select JAM SYNC menu in the main menu GPS x TIME SETUP JAM SYNC APPLY Press ENTER to synchronize now GPS7 x TIME SETUP JAM SYNC ENABLE OFF Initiates JAM synchronization ON OFF GPS7 x TIME SETUP JAM SYNC SETUP A Scheduled Time 00 00 00 lt gt Edit time CANCEL J 1970 213 Figure 3 66 GPS7 module JAM SYNC submenu APPLY Press the ENTER button to immediately synchronize the module timecode with the GPS signal timecode ENABLE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to turn ON or OFF the Jam Sync function SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the Jam Sync schedule to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE A daily Jam Sync should be performed on systems running at non integer frame rates TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 131 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module LEAP SECOND Submenu 3 132 Use this menu to schedule when leap seconds are implemented For many applications it
18. 4 43 PAL sub carrier 5 and 10 MHz m Alarm output capability The AGL7 must be running software version 4 6 or later to output an alarm signal Additionally the AGL7 hardware must be at Version 3 x or above to support outputting an alarm signal NOTE The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the mainframe GPI is enabled and the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable See page 2 33 Using the Mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI PAL M and PAL N are not supported by the AGL7 ATG7 and BG7 modules There are three rear panel output connectors that can output black burst signals and HDTV trilevel sync signals TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 7 AGL7 Analog Genlock Module Operating Procedure 3 8 After the AGL7 module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display ag After the initialization process the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AGL7 module main menu appears as shown b
19. Flat Field 100 Flat Field MULTI BURST Multiburst Multiburst 1 10 MHz Multiburst 10 20 MHz Multiburst 20 30 MHz SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 1 15 MHz 100 Sweep 1 30 MHz MONITOR Monitor 75 Blue Field 75 Green Field 75 Red Field Convergence PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2730 Pulse and Bar TIMING Timing Bowtie ins Markers Co site Pulse SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER 3 216 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator HDVG7 Module Main Menu Use the HDVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signals Scroll the active picture area of the output signal m Enable or disable the output and set parameters for each embedded audio group m Enable or disable the Y Pb and or Pr components on the video output signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 217 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the HDVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button A HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94i 100 Color Bars A V ENTER A ENTER HDVG7 x MOVING PICTURE To MOVING PICTURE submenu eee a fA ENTER HDVG7 x OVERLAY To OVERLAY submenu CANCEL Group1 ENTER HDVG7 x AUDIO EMBEDDED lt p Group 2 To AUDIO G
20. Front panel test signal buttons 00 00 ccc c ccc ence eee ence eee cnet ene e ease nee e ea eennees 3 52 Figure 3 27 AWVG7 module main MeNu 2 cee eee eee ene eee eee eect ene eeaeeaeneeneetaenaeeas 3 53 Figure 3 28 AWVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ceceeeeee eee eneeeeeeeeees 3 54 Figure 3 29 AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu 00 c eee cece ne eec eee eeeeeeeneeteeeaeeas 3 55 Figure 3 30 AWVG7 module LOGO submenu 0 0 sce cce eee ee eee ene ee eee eeaeeeeneeteeeaeas 3 56 Figure 3 31 AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 00 cece cece ence eee ee eee eneeteenaeeas 3 57 Figure 3 32 AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 0 cecceee cece ne ene ene eeeeeaeeeeneetaeeaeeas 3 59 Figure 3 33 AWVG7 module TIMING submenu ccc cee ec cece ee ence neeeeeeaeeeeneeeaeeaeas 3 60 Figure 3 34 AWVG7 module VIDEO submenu 0 ccece eee ee ence nen eee eeaeeeeneetaenaees 3 62 Figure 3 35 BG7 module main menu 0 e cece cece eee ce eect ee eee ee ene ene eeaeeaeneeneeeaenaeeas 3 66 Figure 3 36 BG7 module SELECT FORMAT submenu ccs ceeeeeneee eee eneeeeeeeeeeees 3 67 Figure 3 37 BG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu 00 ccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeaeeas 3 68 Figure 3 38 BG7 module TIMING subment sce cee ce ence eee ee ene eee eee eeaeeeeneeteenaeas 3 69 Figure 3 39 BG7 module TIMECODE submenu 0
21. If Submenu your mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed you can also assign a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the OTHER test signal button The following figure shows the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Select SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN in the UTILITY submenu TG 00 TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN HDVG TG700 FRAME PICTURE KEY ASSIGN HDVG7 Figure 2 21 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu lt gt Select a module 1 gt Select a module TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Assigns signal sets to a specific front panel test signal button The mainframe is shipped from the factory with signal sets corresponding to each button name already assigned For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button the three types of color bars signals 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars and SMPTE Color Bars are available for output Perform the following steps to assign signal sets to a specific test signal button 1 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the module to which you want to assign signal sets and then press the ENTER button This will display the following submenu to assign signal sets The first line shows the name of the test signal button and second line shows the name of the assigned signal set TG700 HDVG7 COLOR BAR KEY COLOR BAR 2 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the test signal button to which you want to assign a
22. LTC submenu 3 135 LTC TIMING submenu 3 137 LTC GPI connector 2 10 Main menu 3 112 Operating procedure 3 99 Oven calibration 3 100 POWER indicator 2 10 3 125 Product description 3 98 PROGRAM TIME submenu 3 130 Rear panel connectors 2 10 REF IN connector 2 11 REFERENCE submenu 3 116 TIME OF DAY submenu 3 126 TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu 3 128 TIMECODE submenu 3 122 VITC submenu 3 123 H Hardware installation 1 5 HD clock conflicts 2 17 HD Dual Link Video Generator See HDLG7 HD3G7 ANC PAYLOAD submenu 3 186 Ancillary Payload example 3 191 AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu 3 178 CALIBRATION submenu 3 196 DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 194 Factory default settings 3 197 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Index Functional checks 1 33 HD SDIIN connector 2 12 Installing enhanced signal sets 3 156 Main menu 3 170 Modifying a Zone Plate Signal 3 158 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 177 Operating procedure 3 145 OUTPUT MODE submenu 3 176 Product description 3 144 Rear panel connectors 2 12 SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu 3 193 Select sample structure and depth 3 150 Select the output mode 3 149 Select the signal format 3 150 Select the test signal 3 151 Selecting a Zone Plate Signal 3 158 Selecting an output signal 3 146 Selecting converter mode 3 148 Selecting generator mode 3 146 SIGNAL 1 connector 2 12 SIGNAL 2 connector 2 12 TIMECODE submenu 3 182 TIMING submenu 3 181 TRIG OU
23. MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Chroma Noise PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar T Pulses TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator Table 3 8 AVG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Signals in the signal set 50 Bowtie 100 Bowtie Test Matrix 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red 5 Step Modulated Ramp Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid 5 Step Valid Ramp Button name Signal set TIMING Timing SDI OTHER Other 625 YPbPr format COLOR BAR Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst 60 Sweep Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 100 Red 75 Red 2T Pulse amp Bar T Pulses 50 Bowtie 100 Bowtie Test Matrix 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars Oversize Ramp Luminance Ramp Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix 5 Step SWEEP Sweep MONITOR Monitor PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing SDI OTHER Other 625 GBR format COLOR BAR Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity FLAT FIELD Flat F
24. One HD SDI input for use as the converter input One clock frame line trigger output Generates test signals in many formats with both 3G SDI Level A and Level B mapping structures supported Standard test signals including SMPTE color bars and SDI pathological test patterns Zone plate test signals with full control of all parameters Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Up to 32 channels of 24 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz AV Timing mode Timing adjustment anywhere in the frame for the output The clock resolution is 6 75 ns 1 148 5 MHz for fast progressive signals 50p 59 94p and 60p Clock resolution for other signals is 13 5 ns Timecode generator with ATC LTC or ATC VITC Full remote control using Ethernet interface SMPTE 352M payload identifier User defined ancillary data packet TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Operating Procedure After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe 2 Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check
25. Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When you turn this mode on the specified audio and video signals are synchronously on for 0 5 second and off for 4 5 seconds With this signal you can measure the time delay that accumulates between the audio and video content of the television signal during signal transport The time delay can be measured by a video analyzer with the serial digital video signal or by an oscilloscope with the analog audio and video signals extracted from the serial digital video signal The following settings are recommended for the audio and video signals when you use this mode m Audio signal CH1 and CH2 of Group 1 10000 Hz 20 dBFS Video signal 100 Flat Field NOTE The AV Timing Mode setting is not saved as a preset TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 93 DVG7 Digital Video Generator BLACK Submenu Use this menu to set the output parameters of the serial digital black signals output Option BK Only from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the BLACK submenu Select BLACK OPTION in the main menu DVG7 x BLACK FORMAT ne 525 143 525 143 lt gt 55 270 i 625 270 Black DVG7 x BLACK SIGNAL 40 Flat Field Black 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Group i EN
26. VITC submenu Select VITC 1 or VITC 2 in the TIMECODE submenu BG7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 OUTPUT DISABLE BG7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 Line number 14 lt gt Select ENABLE or DISABLE lt gt Set the line number 1970 193 Figure 3 40 BG7 module VITC submenu OUTPUT Use this menu item to enable or disable insertion of a VITC on the selected line Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select ENABLE or DISABLE Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Line number Use this menu item to select the video line on which the VITC signal will be inserted Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the video line number The line number range varies by format you can select from line 10 to line 20 for NTSC and from line 6 through line 22 for PAL Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Factory Default Settings BG7 Black Generator The following table shows the factory default settings for the BG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 14 BG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings OUTPUT BLACK 1 to BLACK 4 Format NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 msec Below are menus present when a GPS7 modu
27. and for setting the network parameters on 10 BASE T port Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to upload and download files using the 10 BASE T port Connecting the TG700 to The TG700 uses the rear panel 10 BASE T port to communicate with a PC or your PC s network Use one of the following two methods to connect the TG700 to your PC s See Figure 2 2 on page 2 3 m If you are connecting the TG700 directly to a single PC use a crossover Ethernet cable to connect between the 10 BASE T port on the TG700 and the Ethernet port on the PC If you need to construct your own crossover cable use the following figure to change the pin connections on a straight cable to produce a crossover cable See Figure 2 27 m Ifyou are connecting the TG700 to your local Ethernet network use a straight Ethernet cable to connect between the 10 BASE T port on the TG700 and the Ethernet hub port of your local network By connecting to an Ethernet network you can access the TG700 using any PC on the network Pin 1 TD Pin 1 TD Pin 2 TD Pin 2 TD Pin 3 RD Pin 3 RD Pin 6 RD Pin 6 RD Figure 2 27 Pin connections for a 10BASE T crossover Ethernet cable Setting Ethernet Network Use the NETWORK SETUP submenu to set the network parameters for the Parameters TG700 Accessing the NETWORK SETUP submenu Perform the following procedure to access the NETWORK SETUP submenu 1 Press the front panel MODULE button r
28. between GPS time and UTC As of December 31 2008 a total of 34 leap seconds are required for the adjustment between TAI and UTC This information only stays current when a GPS signal is connected On instrument boot up stored leap second information is used and an asterisk appears next to the time in the status screen until the leap second information from the GPS signal is received Time Zone Offset The GPS7 has a selectable offset between UTC and the local time usually representing the local time zone This offset can be specified in hours minutes seconds allowing specification of time zones that do not align with the usual hours only offset or for other applications not related to time zones You can also use this setting to set the internal time to calculate backwards to the Master Time When the input time source is set to VITC the instrument works similar to how it works in internal mode pre correcting the master time of day by the time zone offset This pre correction assumes that the incoming time code has the correct local time and causes the outgoing time codes to nominally match the incoming ones regardless of time zone offset This means that when switching from GPS to VITS mode the time zone offset usually does not need to change However if the time code synchronization mode is set to Synchronize now or Synchronize once and the time zone offset is changed after the time code sync has occurred then the time zon
29. c aph per active picture height c aph The Ky V Sweep parameter sets the increase or decrease in vertical frequency down the frame Ky compares to Kx as Ky compares to Kx Again a good way to see the effect of Ky is to view the field on a waveform monitor With KY set to 0 0 a Ky coefficient of 10 will result in the apparent vertical sine wave changing from DC to 10 c aph from the top of the picture to the bottom To center the DC point at mid screen set Ky to 2 times Ky The Vertical Sweep zone plate is a Ky2 only zone plate See Figure 3 80 Figure 3 80 A Ky2 only zone plate K Parameter Display name K Phase Units cycles The Kg parameter is the initial phase of the pattern it cannot create a pattern by itself To see the effects of this adjustment first set the Kx coefficient to approximately 0 75 and set a waveform monitor to view the line waveform Then adjust Kg The sine wave will begin on each line at the selected point in the cycle Note that 0 25 cycle corresponds to a phase of 90 degrees or 2 2 radians recall that the sine of 90 is 1 0 and the sine of 90 is 1 0 When Kg 0 25 the pattern will begin in the upper left corner of the screen as white when Kg 0 25 the beginning will be black 3 166 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Ky Parameter Display name KXT T Ch H Freq Units c aph per se
30. lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 41 AVG7 Analog Video Generator 3 42 EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 U ENTER button to enable the text edit mode U amp xa0 amp xa0 to the character you want to change U se the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select EDIT and then press the se the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to move the underscore character se the up A or down arrow button to select the desired character After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator CIRCLE Submenu Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and to set its position on the display Use the up A or down arrow button to scr
31. lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A r N MODULE FORMAT COLORBAR LINEARITY FLATFELD MULTIBURST SWEEP FRONT PANEL ENABLE J a MONITOR PULSE BAR TING SD OTER NT AEF EXT REF Oo To 2T 2T A Figure 3 41 Front panel test signal buttons If your TG700 mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed you can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the DVG7 module See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the signal sets that are assigned to each test signal button and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set The list of available signals changes depending on the selected signal format Table 3 15 DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set 525 143 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Luminance Ramp Mod Shallow Ramp Modulated 10 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ram
32. troughs shown as gray or black The cycles can occur in all three of the video dimensions horizontally or along each line of the picture vertically or down the video frame and temporally with time The three dimensions are often referred to by the shorthand designations of X Y and T The luminance of any point in the picture physically on the screen and in time is determined by the value of sine at that particular point the value of sine follows from the phase of the cycle at that point and by the definition of a zone plate the phase of any point is determined by the equation Pryt ko kx a ky y kr t kxr zt kyr yt kxy xy 1 1 1 5 kx x ahr y ahr t where x y and t are the coordinates of the point in question and ko kx ky kr kxr kyr kxy kx2 ky and kr2 are constants All HD3G7 zone plate patterns are defined with coefficients of ten parameters that correspond to the constants in the above equation Note that while the possibilities are virtually endless most common zone plates are defined with only one or two parameters while the coefficients of the remaining parameters are kept at zero The HD3G7 Generator module generates six standard zone plate signals circle frequency diagonal frequency horizontal sine frequency horizontal sweep frequency vertical sine frequency and vertical sweep frequency Each standard zone plate signal has a pattern control parameter See Tab
33. version 3 1 or later software The module is an analog video signal generator which provides analog composite and component video signals in various formats The module contains the following features Supports the following system formats NTSC NTSC no setup PAL 525 GBR 525 YPbPr 525 Beta 625 GBR and 625YPbPr Six analog composite or component video outputs Outputs a frame picture created by the Frame Picture Generator application when 64 MB of memory is installed See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 29 AVG7 Analog Video Generator Operating Procedure After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 a Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press t
34. 3 12 AWVG7 module factory default settings 0 ccc cece ence eee ee eee ee eee ene sean ees 3 63 Table 3 13 BG7 module signals for each signal format ce ccc ece cence eee ene eeeeenaeenee es 3 68 Table 3 14 BG7 module factory default settings cece cece cece cence ee eee ee ee eee en eee na eens 3 73 Table 3 15 DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons cccceeeee eee es 3 77 Table 3 16 DVG7 module factory default settings 0 0 ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eneeenaeenee es 3 95 Table 3 17 Figures of merit for signal quality ccce cece cece eee e ee cence eee ene eneeeeaeeneeenaes 3 105 Table 3 18 GPS7 module output signal formats 00 ccc cce cece nce eee ence eee e ee enneeeneenees 3 120 Table 3 19 LTC output signal formats 00 ccc cece cece eee e een nent cnet e nee een ne eee tenes 3 136 Table 3 20 GPS7 module factory default settings 00 ccc cce ccc eee eee cnet eee e ee enneeeanennees 3 141 Table 3 21 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cena eee 3 146 Table 3 22 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level A 1280 x 720 0c ccccecee eee en ee eee eee ennees 3 146 Table 3 23 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level A 2K x 1080 cc cece cece eee cece eae e es 3 146 Table 3 24 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 ccc cece cece eee ee cence eens
35. 4 or right arrow button to set the horizontal coarse timing For NTSC PAL and HDTV trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 1 ps Horizontal Fine Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the horizontal fine timing For NTSC and PAL signals you can adjust the timing by 10 00 ns For HD trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 7 00 ns BLACK TIMECODE Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected BLACK output Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 122 NOTE This submenu is available only when NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL is the selected signal format BLANK ON GPS UNLOCK Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to turn ON or OFF the blanking function on the BLACK 2 output when a loss of lock to the GPS signal is detected When turned on the BLACK 2 output will be blanked as long as the loss of lock condition occurs This purpose of this function is to trigger a change over If configured to blank on loss of lock this output should not be used for normal reference applications NOTE This submenu is available only when BLACK 2 is the selected output TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 121 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module TIMECODE Submenu Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the BLACK su
36. 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 18 characters for the text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down V arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file being output SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save them to the signal file TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 25 ATG7 Analog Test Generator 3 26 TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in th
37. 444 12b HD format e YCbCr 422 10b When the desired sample structure is displayed press the ENTER button to select it TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Select the Test Signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons See Table 3 33 When the HD3G7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 75 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A a ki MODULE COLOREAR LINEARITY FLATFIELD MULTIBURST SWEEP FRONT PANEL ENABLE LJ OJ OJ ee FORMAT MONITOR PULSEBAR TMING SDI OTER NTAEF yo CF OC CO exter Figure 3 75 Front panel test signal buttons The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is in generator mode Table 3 33 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signals in the signal set Description COLOR BAR 100 Color Bars Eight ful
38. AV Timing Mode Turns the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 231 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator BLACK Submenu Option BK Only HDVG7 x BLACK FORMAT 1080 60i HDVG x BLACK SIGNAL Black Group 1 HDVG7 x BLACK TIMING HDVG7 x BLACK AUDIO EMBEDDED When you turn this mode on the specified audio and video signals are synchronously on for 0 5 second and off for 4 5 seconds With this signal you can measure the time delay that accumulates between the audio and video content of the television signal during signal transport The time delay can be measured by a video analyzer with the serial digital video signal or by an oscilloscope with the analog audio and video signals extracted from the serial digital video signal The following settings are recommended for the audio and video signals when you use this mode Audio signal CH1 and CH2 of Group 1 10000 Hz 20 dBFS m Video signal 100 Flat Field NOTE The AV Timing Mode setting is not saved as a preset Use this menu to set the parameters of the serial digital signals output from the BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figur
39. Button Reference Indicators When the ATG7 AVG7 AWVG7 DVG7 HD3G7 HDLG7 or HDVG7 module is selected active use the FORMAT button to change the video format for the output signal Pressing this button displays the menu to allow you to select a format for the active module Use these buttons to control the menu display See page 2 18 Using the Mainframe Menus Arrow A Y lt 4 and gt Buttons Use these arrow buttons to scroll through the available menu items ENTER button Use the ENTER button to enable the selected menu item CANCEL button Use the CANCEL button to disable the selected menu item and return to the previous menu item Use these buttons to select the output test signals Each of these 10 buttons represents a signal set or group of the same type of test signals You scroll through the test signals in a signal set by repeatedly pressing the test signal button You can change the signal assignment using the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu See page 2 25 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Submenu Use this button to enable or disable the front panel buttons When pressing this button for about one second while the front panel buttons are enabled all of the front panel buttons are disabled If you have selected a timeout period in the FRONT PANEL DISABLE item in the UTILITY submenu and that period passes without a button push all of the front panel buttons are also disabled Press and hold this button for about three s
40. DIAGNOSTICS Submenu 3 194 Use this menu to view operation parameters for the HD3G7 module Module diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu Selection by the DIAGNOSTICS in the main menu HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS PLL STATUS Jit Unlk Flex0 Unik Flex1 Lock HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS DDS STATUS DDSO Phase Lock DDS Phase Lock HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS CRC ERRORS Y 0 YANC 0 C 0 CANC 0 HD3G x DIAGNOSTICS CLEAR CRC ERRS Press Enter to Clear CRC errors HD3G x DIAGNOSTICS TEMPERATURES Board Temp 44C FPGA Temp 46 C HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS FPGA VERSION Current 3 6 Expected 3 6 Ok y HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 1 1 2V 12V OK 1 2A 1 2V OK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 2 3 3V 3 4V OK 3 3VA 3 1V OK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 3 1 5V 16V OK 3 0VA 3 1V OK HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS VOLTAGE MON 4 1 8V 1 9V OK Dref 1 0V OK 1970 2268 Figure 3 95 HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator PLL STATUS This diagnostic displays the following m Jit Indicates the condition of the jitter attenuator used to clean up the clock recovered from the input signal The condition can be reported as Lock locked or Unlk unlocked This diagnostic readout is only valid
41. Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field or 100 Flat Field The alpha channel data are used only with the following sampling structures 1080 GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 4 4 10 bits and 1080 YCbCr A 4 2 2 12 bits LINK OFFSET Sets the timing offset of the Link B output relative to the Link A output Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the LINK OFFSET submenu See page 3 211 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Selects the signal sets to be assigned to the test signal button Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following two signal sets HD Test Signal Assigns standard HD video test signals to the test signal buttons See Table 3 37 on page 3 204 Projector Test Pattern Assigns digital cinema projector test patterns to the test signal buttons These signal sets are only selectable in the 2K format See Table 3 38 on page 3 205 MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 211 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator LINK OFFSET Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the Link B output relative to the Link A output The following figure shows the LINK OFFSET submenu Select LINK OFFSET in the main menu Pa i a lt 0 2020 ms to 0 2020 ms Figure 3 98 HDLG7 module
42. GPS Antenna Requirements You can use the GPS7 module menu to enable this connector to provide 3 3 V or 5 V DC power to the antenna When the connector is configured to provide power to the antenna the rear panel POWER indicator lights as follows Blinks green to indicate an open circuit This occurs if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used Displays solid red if the connected antenna is shorted A shorted antenna will not damage the GPS7 module If a splitter is used on the antenna it may appear as a short at DC but will still pass through the RF signal which will allow the GPS to function Displays solid green if the current load of the antenna is within the nominal range LTC GPI 15 pin D sub connector that carries four differential LTC signals one ground closure input and two ground closure outputs You can use the menus to independently set the format and timing of the four LTC signals and to select the function of the ground closure input and outputs The LTC GPI connector provides full functionality when you use the LTC DSUB to XLR breakout cable that is available as an optional accessory with the GPS7 module The LTC GPI connector provides partial functionality when you use a standard RGBHV VGA to BNC breakout cable See Table 2 1 NOTE You do not need the optional LTC and GPI breakout cable if you are using only VITC and or ATC as a
43. Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module HDLG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 13 HDLG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 36 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module Product Description The HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module can be operated in either of the following two modes Dual link converter The module can convert a SMPTE 292M serial digital video stream carrying a SMPTE 274M signal to a SMPTE 372M serial digital dual link video signal Dual link generator The module can output either HD SDI video test signals or projector test patterns digital cinema 2K formats only Refer to the TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for information about which dual link outputs can be converted from each input signal format Refer to Selecting the Converter Mode for information about the available types of conversions See page 3 206 The module provides the following features Two pairs of dual link out
44. Kr are non zero Enabling the T Reset parameter does not set the other parameters to zero If you then alter any of the K parameters the temporal t coordinate will be allowed to change to match Subsequent changes to K parameters will first reset the time coordinate t and then allow it to change with the K parameter Disable allows the zone plate time coordinate to increment continuously When T Reset is set to Disable resetting all of the time coefficients Kxr Kyr Kr and K to zero will stop the apparent zone plate motion but the temporal coordinate will remain where it is even if it has moved to an off screen position You must Enable the T Reset parameter to reset the temporal coordinate to zero To completely disable all motion and reset the pattern set all of the time related K parameters to zero and set the T Reset parameter to Enable TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Using Zone Plate Signals Here is an example of how you can use zone plate signals to simplify a common task One common task is measuring the horizontal frequency response of a system With a typical swept frequency generator you would apply a signal such as a 1 MHz to 30 MHz sweep with markers every 5 MHz Then you try to estimate the frequency of the 3 dB roll off point by interpolating the position of the 3 dB point between the markers The HD3G7 generator module s adjustable zone plate signa
45. Menu item name Settings CHANNEL 1 to CHANNEL 8 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF RESOLUTION 20 bits AUDIO VIDEO SYNC Free Run AUDIO TIMING Delay or Advance 0 0 msec TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock Module AGL7 Analog Genlock Module This section describes the module specific functions of the AGL7 Analog Genlock module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module AGL7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 5 AGL7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 14 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module Product Description The AGL7 Analog Genlock module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module provides genlock function for the mainframe and installed modules It is equipped with two reference inputs the loopthrough inputs and the terminated CW input The AGL7 module can genlock the following signals m NTSC black burst signal burst lock or syne lock PAL black burst signal burst lock and sync lock HDTV trilevel sync signal m CW 1 3 58 NTSC sub carrier
46. Program to be transferred to an additional machine for local execution a separate license shall be required for each such machine with which the Program may be used or each concurrent user authorized under a floating user license Title to the Program and all copies thereof but not the media on which the Program or copies may reside shall be and remain with Tektronix or others for whom Tektronix has obtained a respective licensing right Customer shall pay when due all property taxes that may now or hereafter be imposed levied or assessed with respect to the possession or use of the Program or this license and shall file all reports required in connection with such taxes Any portion of the Program modified by Customer or merged with another program shall remain subject to these terms and conditions If the Program is acquired by or for an agency of the U S Government the Program shall be considered computer software developed at private expense and the license granted herein shall be interpreted as granting Customer restricted rights in the Program and related documentation as defined in the applicable acquisition regulation THE PROGRAM MAY NOT BE USED COPIED MODIFIED MERGED OR TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED BY THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS UPON TRANSFER OF ANY COPY MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF THE PROGRAM THE LICENSE GRANTED HEREIN IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED TERM The license granted herein is effec
47. R signals when a GBR signal is being output Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu Sync ON Green Sync ON All Channels ON OFF ON OFF AWVG7 x VIDEO CH3 ON Pr ON OFF Figure 3 34 AWVG7 module VIDEO submenu GBR SYNC Sets whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B signal and R signal when a GBR signal is being output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Syne ON Green and Sync ON All Channels When you select Sync ON All Channels a sync signal is multiplexed with the G B and R signals Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu item appears only when a GBR signal is being output CH1 Turns the CH signal output on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name that is displayed before the ON OFF status depends on the format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component or GBR component CH 2 Turns the CH 2 signal output on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name that is displayed before the ON OFF status depends on the format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component or GBR component TG700 TV Signal Generator Pla
48. SIGNAL output m Set the timing offset on the SIGNAL output m Set the APL settings on the SIGNAL output Set the output parameters for the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 and BARS outputs using the SELECT OUTPUT submenu See page 3 119 Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the ATG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button ATG x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars ATG x SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 ATG7 x ID TEXT ATG x TIMING ATG x APL Figure 3 10 ATG7 module main menu ENTER lt ae l To SELECT OUTPUT submenu QQ gt l BARS CANCEL To ID TEXT submenu To TIMING submenu To APL submenu STATUS Displays the current video standard and the selected signal for the SIGNAL output SELECT OUTPUT Selects the output whose parameters will be set Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BARS Select any of the items and then press the ENTER button to access the SELECT OUTPUT submenu See page 3 119 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 21 ATG7 Analog Test Generator ID TEXT Sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the SIGNAL connector Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the ID TEXT submenu See page 3 24 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the SIGNAL output relative to the interna
49. Select the format ee lt gt for BLACK 1 BLACK 2 o submenu or BLACK 3 CANCEL Except when BLACK 3 is selected To TIMING submenu Figure 3 6 AGL7 module OUTPUT submenu SELECT FORMAT Selects the format for the signal output from the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 connector Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the format The available choices described below depend on which output connector you select NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs When BLACK 1 is selected the formats listed below are available Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection and to access the SIGNAL submenu where you will select a black burst signal See page 3 13 NTSC NTSC No Setup PAL When BLACK 2 is selected the formats listed below are available Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection and to access the SIGNAL submenu where you will select a black burst signal See page 3 13 NTSC NTSC No Setup PAL HD SYNC Same as BLACK 3 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock Module When BLACK 3 is selected the formats listed below are available Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection and to enable the selected trilevel sync signal or the black burst signal when Black Burst Same as BLACK2 is selected 1080 60i 1080 59 941 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 720 60p 720
50. The test signals in the HDLG7 module are divided into the following two groups HD SDI video test signals E Projector test patterns digital cinema 2K formats only NOTE Use the HDLG7 module Main menu to configure the module to output HD test signals or projector test patterns See page 3 208 HDLG7 Module Main Menu All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the HDLG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 96 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Press the CANCEL button to return to the main menu Test signal buttons A a D MODULE COLORBAR LINEARITY FLATFELD MULTIBURST SWEEP FRONT PANEL ENABLE LJ LJ CJ LJ J s FORMAT MONITOR PULSEBAR TMNG SDI OTHER NTAEF ee ea ced el exer Figure 3 96 Front panel test signal buttons If your TG700 mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed you can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the DVG7 module See page 1 2 Mai
51. UDW 000 Ox4C UDW 001 0x00 UDW 002 0x00 UDW 003 0x00 UDW 004 0x00 UDW 005 0x00 UDW 006 0x00 UDW 007 0x00 The AFD ancillary data packet should be located in the active line portion of the vertical ancillary space VANC but no earlier than the second line after the RP 168 switch point Line 9 with a sample offset of 0 first word of active video immediately after SAV is a suitable location The selected video channel should be Luma for most ancillary packets including AFD Finally set the ANC PAYLOAD Output mode to Continuous to start AFD insertion of the active test signal For this example the SMPTE RP 219 color bars are an effective test pattern because the center section of the 16 9 test signal contains the original 4 3 aspect ratio SMPTE pattern TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to Enable or Disable the SMPTE 352M Payload Identifier and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The SMPTE 352M payload identifier is a required element for a compliant 3 Gb signal stream In most cases the SMPTE 352M payload setting should be Enable TRIGGER OUTPUT Use this menu to select line rate frame rate or the system clock of the module Submenu to trigger an external instrument The following figure shows the TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu System Clock HD3G7 x TR
52. Video Generator Selecting an Output Signal Select the Signal Format Select the Test Signal To output a signal from the HDVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94i 100 Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows HDVG x SELECT FORMAT 1080 59 94i Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs gt If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press CANCEL press the CANCEL button All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the HDVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 100 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 215 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator For example when
53. and significant when in converter mode If in converter mode it should read locked If not there may be a problem with the input signal or the module Flex0 This circuit is not used so the readout may show locked or unlocked The state has no bearing on instrument operation m Flex Indicates the state of the flexible clock generator This readout should show Lock locked and is only valid and significant when the instrument is in generator mode An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe DDS STATUS This diagnostic displays the following DDSO Phase This circuit is not used so the readout may show locked or unlocked The state has no bearing on instrument operation m DDSI Phase Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with the internal frame pulse This readout should show Lock locked and is only valid and significant when the instrument is in generator mode An Unlk unlocked reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe If the instrument is in converter mode this readout is not active and may show locked or unlocked CRC ERRORS This diagnostic shows how many CRC errors are detected from the input signal If the output signal of the conversion process is not what you expect or the jitter attenuator is having trouble locking then you should check this readout for errors on the input It is normal to see errors when you are conn
54. any of these and press the ENTER button you will access the OUTPUT submenu to set the parameters of the selected output See page 3 12 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 9 AGL7 Analog Genlock Module GENLOCK Submenu Use this menu to select the genlock source for the mainframe and the installed modules set the timing offset and set the instrument actions when lock is lost Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the GENLOCK submenu Select GENLOCK in the main menu Internal 525 SYNC AGL 1 GENLOCK SOURCE A NTSC Burst 625 SYNC Internal 1 NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID HD SYNC PAL Burst CW To TIMING submenu Except when Internal is selected Go Internal Frequency Stay Current Frequency 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group 6 250 Hz PAL and 50 Hz Group AGL7 1 GENLOCK FRAME RESET CW i 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group a gt rite e 3 000 Hz 24 Hz Group V Keep Composite Timing Figure 3 5 AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu SOURCE Selects the signal source to genlock the mainframe and the installed modules Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the genlock source and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select from the following genlock sources m Internal Uses the internal reference signal NTSC Burst Burst locks to an NTSC black burst signal applied to
55. as a function of voltage This menu is only available when the mainframe is in factory mode has software version 5 1 or above installed and has a GPS7 module installed Do not run this characterization if the unit is in service because this step requires a temporary frequency shift You can find a complete gain calibration procedure in the Oven Calibration section See page 3 100 Select CAL OVEN in the UTILITY submenu Execute Calibration ENTER aes Execute calibration routine Yes ENTER No CANCEL 1970 187 Figure 2 26 Gain calibration menu Press the ENTER button to start the gain calibration routine or press the CANCEL button to exit the menu CAUTION To prevent an incorrect oscillator frequency from being stored as the calibrated value be sure that the instrument is locked to one of the following signal sources before you run the internal frequency calibration routine Rubidium clock GPS antenna GPS7 module only or the master sync signal of your video installation To run the gain calibration the instrument must be locked to a GPS reference TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics Connecting to a Network The TG700 has a 10 BASE T port on the rear panel that allows you to use a PC to remotely control the instrument and to upload and download files such as signal or logo files This section provides instructions for connecting the TG700 to a single PC or toa network
56. cece eee ee cece eee cee eeeaeeeeneeeaenaeeas 3 70 Figure 3 40 BG7 module VITC submenu c sce cce nee ne cnet ee eee ene eneeeeeeaeeeeneetaeeaeeas 3 72 Figure 3 41 Front panel test signal buttons 2 cee cce nce ee eee e eect ene eneeeeeeaeeeeneetsenaeeas 3 77 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual v Table of Contents vi Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 DVGF modul mam ment sciseees se tacsesaes vette nen vo areneaneeroaneedines penshedee rons 3 80 DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ccc ccc ccc cee ee eee eeeeeeeeees 3 82 DVG7 module OVERLAY submenu c cc cece cece ence cence eee e ae ee eee eneeees 3 83 DVG7 module LOGO submenu 0 cece cece cece e cence eens eee PEA EEEE 3 84 DVG7 module ID TEXT subment 00 c cece ccc cence cence eens teense enenees 3 85 DVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 00 c cece cece c
57. errors appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 3 4 connector to the 5 6 connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 5 6 connector to the 7 8 connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 7 8 connector to the SILENCE connector and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor Connect the 48 kHz CLOCK connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input using the 75 Q BNC cable and 75 Q termination Check that the appropriate clock signal is displayed on the screen Use the following procedure to check that the AGL7 Analog Genlock module is functional Required Equipment TV signal generator NTSC PAL waveform monitor TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started HDTV waveform monitor E 75 Q BNC cable E 75 Q termination Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes Genlock function 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AGL7 main menu shown below appears AGL 1 GENLOCK STATUS Internal 6 10 11 12 13 Press the up A or down arrow button to select GENLOCK from the main menu and then
58. format is available on the BLACK 3 output only When you select the NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL formats you access submenus where you can select the type of black burst signal Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select either Black Burst or Black Burst with Field REF as the output signal type Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection BLACK TIMING Press the ENTER button to access the BLACK TIMING submenu shown below Select TIMING in the BLACK submenu A GPS7 x BLACK x TIMING NTSC Vertical 0 Line s GPS7 x BLACK x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Course 0 0000 usec GPS7 x BLACK x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec V 1970 221 Figure 3 58 GPS7 module TIMING submenu lt 1 gt gt 525 Line s to 525 Line s lt 1 D gt 63 556 psec to 63 556 psec 1 gt 10 00 nsec to 10 00 nsec TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Use the up A or down arrow button to select a timing parameter and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the parameter Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the vertical timing For NTSC and PAL you can adjust the timing by a color frame For HDTV trilevel sync signals you can adjust the timing by 2 a field or frame progressive or interlaced signals respectively Horizontal Coarse Use the left lt
59. gt arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 2 See Table 3 3 NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously Table 3 2 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 input signals Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns NTSC 525 63 5556 10 00 PAL 1250 64 0000 10 00 1080 60i 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 50i 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 10 00 1080 30p 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 25p 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24p 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 10 00 720 60p 375 22 2222 10 00 720 59 94p 375 22 2444 10 00 720 50p 375 26 6667 10 00 Table 3 3 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns NTSC 525 63 5556 10 00 PAL 1250 64 0000 10 00 1080 60i 562 29 6296 7 00 1080 59 94i 562 29 6593 7 00 1080 50i 562 35 5556 7 00 1080 24sF 562 37 0370 7 00 1080 23 98sF 562 37 0741 7 00 1080 30p 562 29 6296 7 00 1080 29 97p 562 29 6593 7 00 1080 25p 562 35 5556 7 00 1080 24p 562 37 037
60. in every channel m Silence and 48 kHz clock word clock outputs Full remote control using Ethernet interface The module also supports the following audio frequencies Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4800 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 4000 Hz 5000 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1200 Hz 6000 Hz 20000 Hz 400 Hz 1500 Hz 1600 Hz TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 1 AG7 Audio Generator Module Operating Procedure 3 2 After the AG7 module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display ag After the initialization process the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AG7 module main menu appears as shown below AG7 x CHANNEL PARAMETERS Channel 1 5 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus See page 3 3 AG7 Module Main Menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AG
61. installed NOTE To display the TIMECODE submenu the BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed This submenu is available only when NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL is the selected signal format This submenu is not available when the selected signal format is HD SYNC Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the SELECT FORMAT submenu Figure 3 39 BG7 module TIMECODE submenu 3 70 BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE SOURCE lt p gt oni Time of Day Disable BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE OFFSET lt J D gt seroreser 00 00 00 00 BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE 30 DROP lt gt ENABLE DROP FRAME ENABLE DROP FRAME DISABLE DROP FRAME ENTER BG7 3 BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC qp we To VITC submenu VITC 1 VITC 2 CANCEL A V 1970 185 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual BG7 Black Generator SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices Time of Day Uses the time of day as determined from the GPS antenna Program Time Uses the program time counter as the timecode Disable Disables the timecode function for the BG7 module OFFSET Use this menu item to set a time offset for the BG7 module outputs from the timecode input from the GPS7 module You c
62. installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 5 n Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into to the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AVWG7 x STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars a oa Select the signal format and the signal you want to output See page 3 51 Selecting an Output Signal Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to AWVG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 53 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator Selecting an Output Signal To output a signal from the AWVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below Select the Signal Format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Ifthe AWVG7 module menu is not displayed press th
63. may not be the same as the time that a line of data is present on the serial link because of the way that Level B signals are interleaved Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons simultaneously Relative To Sets the Zero Timing D to A compensation factor on or off for HD 1 485 Gb S formats only In the serial mode default the output timing does not include compensation for the delay through a nominal D to A converter Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the relative timing to either Serial 0H or Analog DAC TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 181 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator TIMECODE Submenu Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the MAIN menu A YV HD3G7 x TIMECODE SOURCE Program Time rd gt Program Time Time of Day 2 2 HD3G x TIMECODE OFFSET A s 00 00 00 00 lt J gt Set the timecode offset D CANCEL J HD3G x TIMECODE 30 DROP K lt gt Enable Disable 30 Drop Frame Enable 30 Drop Frame A HD3G7 x TIMECOD
64. menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 83 AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for the embedded audio on the output test signals Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the items and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 226 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 91 VIDEO Enables or disables the Y Pb or Pr component of the output serial digital video signals the EDH Error Detection Handling insertion and the output mode for an audio video timing measurement You can also set the resolution of the output serial digital video signals Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 92 BLACK OPTION This menu selection is available only with Option BK and sets the parameters of the serial digital black signals output from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu See page 3 232 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 81 DVG7 Digital Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Submenu 3 82 Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital
65. might be fine to apply the leap second at midnight UTC but for some time zones this might cause a disruption so the leap second menu allows the leap second to be deferred up to 24 hours Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the LEAP SECOND submenu Select LEAP SECOND menu in the main menu A GPS7 x TIME SETUP LEAP SEC APPLY Use Scheduled Time lt Use Scheduled Time Use Current Time Immediately GPS7 x TIME SETUP LEAP SEC SETUP A p Scheduled Time 00 00 00 1 gt Edit time CANCEL 7 1970 215 Figure 3 67 GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu APPLY Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select when a leap second will be scheduled Select Use Current Time Immediately to apply the leap second adjustment immediately when signalled by the GPS system at 23 59 60 UTC on June 30 or December 31 as appropriate regardless of the local time Select Use Scheduled Time to apply the leap second adjustment at a deferred time as entered in the SETUP menu below SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the schedule time to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as
66. neces eee eee eneedeeeeeeeeeeeneeneenaeeenee ea 2 5 Figure 2 6 Location of J040 and J960 on the AGL7 module cece cece eect ee eeee eee eeee es 2 6 Figure 2 7 ATG7 module COnnectoTs 00 ec eee eee e cee ee ene ene ee eee eden nena eee eeeeneeneenaeeaenneea 2 7 Figure 2 8 AVG7 module connectors 00 eceecc eee e cence ene ene eee ented een eene eee eee ene eneeneeeene ed 2 7 Figure 2 9 AWVG7 module connectors 2 2 0 0 ccc cece cece ene ene eee ene ene n eee tees neces ene eeaeeenae ea 2 8 Figure 2 10 BG7 module connectors 00 e cece eee e cee ce ene ene eee ene ene e nena eee eee eneeneeeaeeeenne ea 2 8 Figure 2 11 DVG7 module connectors Option BK c ccc ccc cece eee eee e nese e ene eeneeeneeenas 2 9 Figure 2 12 GPS7 module connectors cece eee n cence ee eee ene en eee ceeaeeetee ee enenneenaeeeees 2 10 Figure 2 13 HD3G7 module connectors 6 ccc cee e nen ene nee eet nee eee E eed 2 12 Figure 2 14 HDLG7 module connectors 00sec ece eee ne eee eee ene ee cee eeeeenetee eae enenneenaeneens 2 13 Figure 2 15 HDVG7 module connectors Option BK ccccce cece eee e cnet eee eneeeeaeenee es 2 14 Figure 2 16 Mainframe main Menu c ccc cce een eee eee eee ene en cena eeeeeeetee eae enenneenaeeeens 2 18 Figure 2 172 PRESET submenuais c c cicsncenisiee rruna vaste sedan pernstesudb ede adden ee EE 2 19 Figure 2 18 SEQUENCE submenu 00
67. nee es 1 2 ACCOSSOTICS fsx dcctgnndbdaakasdudicnanenonaheuhddaddund aantncadoidutinaaddatdaacaladathnamuadubidande sabaes 1 3 OPUONS AEE E ESE 1 3 Initial Product INspeCt OM oscene eas E a E 1 5 Mainframe Installation scscig oc cesndcdaaidcnsudeded vawlaceacndinennmnecuubidu sandal N A E 1 5 Module Installation and Removal cc cece ence eee eee ener e nee een nant E ees 1 9 Functional Checks aeran enana aaa E EENE E E a A E ANNO EE aN 1 13 Operating Basics Operating Basics sieihisicccur ert oo eE brbenkar T OE T EEPO EEE EE OE ETE 2 1 Front Panel Controls rricirrsmessii roei ii err e A E EE EEE rE OE 2 1 Rear Panel Connectors 23 his fed pnisseci eroi reeter a E A ees EEE EE E E EEEE 2 3 Frame Reset Signals isc pisses oawecings i n a a E A EPRE E E EEE 2 15 Clock Conflict Messages cits csccsccntes irer i ioes A EOE T E a e eneeeas 2 16 Fan Failure Warning Message 0ccc ccc ence eee ener ene nee ene cnet nee een nee een EES 2 17 Using the Mainframe Menus 0ccc cece eee e een eee sese ence een nee een n eee e tne eee EEE 2 18 Connecting to a Network sisi snescesees seth aceersesmeneendaaatansecttiss veewebewan OE e te 2 31 Using the Mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI ccc ccc en cee ee cence ene eeneennees 2 33 Inspection and Cleaning iccsssneceeeas iiccenetcerrense codes blahsieeas seaceenceassauscceteas sonncebens ts 2 43 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual i Table of Co
68. offset digit The time digits take the following form HH MM SS FF After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change TIMING Press the ENTER button to access the LTC TIMING submenu for the selected LTC output See page 3 137 OUTPUT LEVEL Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the signal level of the selected LTC output between 0 5 V and 5 0 V 3 136 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module LTC TIMING Submenu Use this menu to set the delay used for all the signal formats Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the delay See Table 3 19 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the LTC TIMING submenu Select TIMING on the LTC submenu GPS7 x LTC x TIMING 30FPS DROP lt gt Edit delay time Delay 0 00 msec 1970 207 Figure 3 71 GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu GPI Submenu Use this menu to select the function that will be performed when a signal is received on the GPI input The signal is normally pulled high by an internal resistor and will trigger the selected function when pulled low The following figure shows the GPI submenu Select GPIO INPUT 1 in the maine menu NONE GPS x GPI INPUT 1 TRIGGER SELECT Reset Program Time
69. on the selected line Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select ENABLE or DISABLE Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Line number Use this menu item to select the video line on which the selected VITC signal will be inserted Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the video line number For NTSC you can select lines from line 10 to 20 lines 14 and 16 are recommended For PAL you can select lines between 6 and 22 lines 19 and 21 are recommended Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 123 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GPS SETUP Submenu Use this menu to set the GPS operating parameters and set the level at which a warning message will be generated if the GPS signal quality deteriorates Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the GPS SETUP submenu Select GPS SETUP in the main menu a i OFF GPS7 x GPS SETUP ANTENNA POWER lt 33Volt OFF 5 Volt A GPS7 x GPS SETUP POSITION Fixed GPS7 x GPS SETUP ACQUIRE POSITION Press ENTER to reacquire Fixed pos V GPS7 x GPS SETUP SIGNAL WARNING 0 No Signal y 1970 204 2 Fixed lt D Mobile ENTER 7 Reacquire position No Signal Low Signal Acq Satellites Bad Position Acq Position Adj Phase Locked gt Locked gt
70. scroll through the menu The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Disable Status Enable Enable AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE sates ee X Position 0 0 APH et the horizontal position AVWWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position AWVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 32 AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 59 AW
71. selected offset digit After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for you offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator VIDEO Submenu Use this menu to turn each serial digital video component Y Pb or Pr on or off individually and to turn the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu E a VIDEO g VIDEO HDVG Ss VIDEO Pr ON HDVG VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF Figure 3 111 HDVG7 module VIDEO submenu lt gt oF 4h ON gt OFF ON G oF GON Y Turns the Y component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pb Turns the Pb component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pr Turns the Pr component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection
72. selected signal without making any changes High APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 100 flat field signal and then outputs them Low APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 0 flat field signal and then outputs them APL Bounce Outputs the High APL signal and Low APL signal alternately for the period set in the PERIOD menu item Bounce Outputs the 100 flat field signal and 0 flat field signal alternately regardless of the selected signal for the period set in the PERIOD menu item PERIOD Sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in APL Bounce or Bounce mode Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the interval You can set the value from 0 5 seconds to 2 0 seconds in 0 5 second steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 47 AVG7 Analog Video Generator Factory Default Settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the AVG7 Generator module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 9 AVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS
73. selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator OVERLAY Submenu Use this menu to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu ENTER DVG7 x OVERLAY OBJECT Logo To LOGO submenu Logo ID Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle CANCEL To CIRCLE submenu DVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK OFF OFF Fast Slow Figure 3 44 DVG7 module OVERLAY submenu OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 84 ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 85 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 87 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTE
74. set LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Modulated Ramp Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid Ramp Valid 5 Step FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Chroma Noise PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar TPulses TIMING Timing 50 Bowtie 100 Bowtie SDI OTHER Other Test Matrix 525 GBR format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Shallow Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Luminance Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 100 Line Sweep 5 5 MHz 100 Line Sweep 8 MHz MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge White Window 4 Level Ped amp Pluge PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing Bowtie SDI OTHER 525 YPbPr format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Ramp Oversize Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid Ramp Valid 5 Step Modulated Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave
75. shows how to install the TG700 into the rack Carefully insert the rack slides attached to the TG700 into the pieces attached to the rack Support the TG700 until the stop latches click into place on both sides The installation is not secure until this latching occurs Continue to slide the TG700 completely into the rack Slide out track Figure 1 2 Placing the TG700 in the rack To remove the TG700 from the rack slide it out until it stops at the catches Support the TG700 while you press in on the stop latch buttons on each side This action will free the TG700 to slide completely out of the rack Provide support while you slide the TG700 mainframe out of the rack Environmental Operating Check that the location of your installation has the proper operating environment Requirements as listed in the following table See Table 1 3 N CAUTION Damage to the instrument can occur if this instrument is powered on at temperatures outside the specified temperature range Table 1 3 TG700 environmental requirements Parameter Description Temperature Operating 0 C to 50 C Nonoperating 20 C to 60 C Relative Operating 20 to 80 No condensation Maximum wet bulb Humidity temperature 29 4 C Nonoperating 5 to 90 No condensation Maximum wet bulb temperature 40 0 C TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 7 Getting Started Connecting Power A Table 1 3 TG700 environmental requireme
76. signal or the internal reference signal Use the up A or down arrow button to select between Vertical and Horizontal offset The following figure shows the TIMING submenu From SELECT FORMAT submenu BG x TIMING NTSC Vertical 0 Line s lt gt Adjust vertical timing BG7 x TIMING NTSC Horizontal 0 0000 msec 1 gt Adjust horizontal timing Figure 3 38 BG7 module TIMING submenu NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously The horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments You can match the timing of the AGL7 module to the BG7 module by adjusting the fine timing controls on the AGL7 module Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the vertical offset For NTSC or PAL format signal you can set the value from 1 2 color frame to 1 2 color frame in 1 line steps For the HDTV trilevel sync signal you can set the value from 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame in 1 line steps Horizontal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the horizontal offset You can set the value from 1 line to 1 line in one clock steps 18 5 ns for NTSC or PAL 13 5 ns for HDTV TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 69 BG7 Black Generator TIMECODE Submenu Use this submenu to set timecode parameters for the selected output This menu is present only if GPS7 module is
77. signal set for example COLOR BAR KEY 3 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the signal set you want to assign to the selected test signal button for example COLOR BAR 4 Press the ENTER button to assign the signal set to the selected test signal button 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all signal set assignments are completed TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 25 Operating Basics NETWORK INFORMATION 2 26 Submenu FRAME PICTURE KEY ASSIGN Assigns frame picture files downloaded to the TG700 to the OTHER test signal button This operation is required to output the frame picture files as a picture natural picture or test pattern NOTE To download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator application and output it as a picture your TG700 mainframe must have 64 MB of memory installed See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Perform the following steps to assign a frame picture file to the OTHER test signal button 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the module to which you want to assign a frame picture file and press the ENTER button This will display the following submenu The second line shows the folder name that was created when the frame picture file was downloaded to the TG700 TG700 HDVG7 OTHER KEY 1080 60i 2 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the folder in which the frame picture
78. so it will appear differently in YCbCr RGB or XYZ color spaces On each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level black and at the valid level Limit Ramp Wide ramp that spans the legal limit range 4 1019 for 10 bit formats and 16 4079 for 12 bit formats for all three channels On each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level the valid level and the limit level Shallow Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of shallow ramps that together span the range between legal limits 4 1019 for 10 bit formats and 16 4079 for 12 bit formats Each bit value is held for 16 pixels for 10 bit formats and for 4 pixels for 12 bit formats There is overlap between the end of one ramp and the start of the next ramp Color Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of ramps across the colors available in the valid RGB gamut Each set of ramps transitions between adjacent hues red yellow green cyan magenta blue red From the top of the pattern the first three rows of ramps are at 25 50 and 75 saturation The fourth row of ramps includes fully saturated colors at 100 value The next three rows of ramps are at 75 50 and 25 value The bottom row of ramps is monochrome 3 152 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Table 3 33 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Descrip
79. submenu 2 21 Service manual xviii Setting Ethernet parameters 2 31 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu 2 25 Signal quality Figures Of Merit FOM 3 105 Standard accessories 1 3 T Test signal buttons 2 2 Time flow block diagram 3 106 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Index Timecode As related to time flow 3 106 U UTILITY submenu 2 23 Z Zone Plate signals Parameters Dependent 3 162 Zone Plate Signals Control parameters 3 160 Defined 3 157 Dependent parameters 3 162 Modifying 3 158 Parameters Control 3 160 Selecting 3 158 Using 3 169 Index 5
80. system to exceed the allowed antenna current Check that the LED on the module rear panel is a steady red This indicates a short circuit Remove the terminators and the connection to the voltmeter Lock to GPS through antenna CAUTION To avoid antenna damage do not turn on the DC antenna power until you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage Antenna damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started 1 Set the antenna voltage as needed by the antenna in the test system 2 Navigate to the signal quality menu a Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module b Use the up A or down arrow button to select STATUS from the GPS7 module menu c Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Signal Quality 3 Connect the GPS input signal feed to the antenna input on the rear of the module 4 Check that the signal quality changes from No Signal to Low Signal to Acquiring satellites to Adjusting phase to Locked NOTE It is okay if some steps are skipped Depending on the signal level it may take from a few seconds to several minutes to leave the No Signal state 5 Make sure that the instrument has been running for at least 20 minutes before performing the next step 6 Enter the Diagnostics menu and check for fine status This indicates the GPS is
81. the TG700 does not lock to a genlock signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection m Near Loss of Lock Enables or disables the mainframe GPI alarm when the frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference shift considerably and the TG700 seems to be near loss of lock Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 41 Operating Basics ALG7 ALARM SELECT submenu Use this menu to select which AGL7 module alarms are enabled or disabled Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu Select AGL7 ALARM SELECT in the UTILITY submenu TG 00 UTILITY AGL7 ALARM SELECT No Signal Disable TG700 UTILITY AGL7 ALARM SELECT Loss of Lock Disable TG 00 UTILITY AGL ALARM SELECT Near Loss of Lock Disable The AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu contains the following selections Disabl lt gt bate Disabl lt I gt Erbe Disabl lt I gt rable 1970 189 No Signal Enables or disables the AGL7 module alarm when a genlock signal is not connected Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selectio
82. the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Data ID and exit Data ID editing SDID Press the ENTER button to edit the Secondary ID word You can set the Secondary ID from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Secondary ID and exit Secondary ID editing DC Press the ENTER button to edit the Data Count word to show the number of User Data Words to follow You can set the Data Count from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down Y arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Data Count and exit Data Count editing UDW Use this menu selection to set a User Data Word Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select the User Data Word you wish to edit from word 000 through word 254 and then press the ENTER button to edit that User Data Word You can set the User Data Word from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to Ox3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and ri
83. the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select 1080 60i in the Select Format menu Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM7120 shows a 1080 60i signal on the reference input Disconnect the Black 1 signal from the module and the WFM7120 Connect the Black 2 signal from the module to the reference input of the WFM7120 Set Black 2 to a 1080 50i signal on the GPS7 module a Press the CANCEL button to exit the Black 1 submenu b Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Black 2 c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 50i e Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM7120 shows a 1080 50i signal on the reference input Use the left lt 4 arrow button to select PAL Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 arrow button to select Black Burst Press the ENTER button Check that the WFM7120 shows PAL on the reference input Press the CANCEL button to exit the PAL submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Getting Started Press the CANCEL button again to exit the Select Format submenu Disconnect the Black 2 signal from the module and the WFM7120 Connect the Black 3 signal from the module to the reference input of the WFM7120 Set Black 3 to a PAL signal on the GPS7 module a Use the right gt arrow button to select Black 3 b Press the ENTER button c Use the right
84. the timing offset of the output signal relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu AVG x TIMING NTSC or ee Vertical 0 Line 3 lt gt Set the vertical timing in 1 line steps V AVG7 x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Coarse 0 000 msec V lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps AVG7 x TIMING NTSC Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 0 1 ns steps Figure 3 23 AVG7 module TIMING submenu NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 frame of the selected signal format in 1 line steps Horizontal coarse Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line of the selected signal format in 1 clock 18 5 ns steps Horizontal fine Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset You can set the value from 10 ns to 10 ns in 0 1 ns steps 3 44 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual VIDEO Submenu AVG7 Analog Video Generator
85. the use of natural resources we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately This symbol indicates that this product complies with the applicable European Union requirements according to Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and batteries For information about recycling options check the Support Service section of the Tektronix Web site www tektronix com Restriction of Hazardous This product has been classified as Monitoring and Control equipment and is Substances outside the scope of the 2002 95 EC RoHS Directive xvi TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Preface This manual describes the capabilities of the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Products The information in this manual applies to the following products About This Manual TG700 TV Generator Platform AG7 Audio Generator Module AGL7 Analog Genlock Module ATG7 Analog Test Generator Module AVG7 Analog Video Generator Module AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator Module BG7 Black Generator Module DVG7 Digital Video Generator Module GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Module HDLG7 HD Dual Link Generator Module HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator Module This manual is composed of the following sections Getting Started shows you how to configure and ins
86. timecode signal For correct operation if you use a VGA to BNC breakout cable pins 6 7 8 and 10 must be internally grounded together in the cable and to the connector shell 2 10 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics Table 2 1 GPS7 module LTC GPI connector pin assignments Pin Function VGA cable 1 GP01 Red BNC 6 2 GP02 Green BNC tho z ol 3 GPI Blue BNC F o 4 No connection F 0 i5 5 LTC4N 10 6 Ground Ground 7 LTC3N Ground 8 LTC2N Ground 9 No connection 10 LTC1N Ground 11 No connection 12 LTC3P 13 LTC2P H BNC 14 LTC1P V BNC 15 LTC4P BLACK 1 REF IN Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal You can also configure this connector to receive analog video signals for use as a Genlock reference Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the reference input capability On these modules the connector is labeled BLACK 1 BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal You can configure this output connector to turn off if certain errors are detected The output will remain off as long as the error occurs Use this function to trigger a downstream ECO to switch to backup BLACK 3 10 MHz Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal You can also configure this connector to output a 10 MHz sine wave This connector is labeled 10 MHz BLACK 3 on earlier GPS7 modules NOTE
87. weather and other conditions 9 Locked gt gt gt gt Signal quality is gt 42 10 Locked gt gt gt gt gt Signal quality is gt 68 11 Locked gt gt gt gt gt gt Signal quality is gt 110 NOTE The duration of some states depends on the strength of the received GPS signal If the antenna only has access to part of the sky or if the cable loss between the antenna and the receiver is too large then it may take significantly longer to progress up to the higher entries in the FOM table The following time flow diagram shows time information is used at different points in the system In particular it illustrates how the different user inputs and configuration settings combine with the time base to create the timecode An asterisk denotes points of possible user input TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 022 06 sas Nd JWV 4 INO d9 Ya INGSHOS ASYL JAIL WWedS0ud ANISNA ANVeSs ZOACH IaS QH ONIWIL LAdLNO ono JNI N3 L 13S440 l Move SOTWNY 294 MOVIE LSd9 MOVIE ONIAIL LAdLNO po9 DE Sul aounos ANIDNA OL 0114 Sdd Poon 13S440 l ONIWIL LNAdLNO apop _ Sul aounos 13S440 Ol ANIONA L 8pod Sul AW1dSI0 AVG 40 ANIL JOUJOU IA SUal O o SNOILVINDWO HOOd4 Y
88. would allow the GPS to function Displays solid green if the current load of the antenna is within the nominal range POSITION Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Fixed or Mobile The Fixed and Mobile settings define how the GPS receiver calculates the time and position information In fixed mode an averaged position is stored in flash memory and only the time is calculated each second This provides greater stability of the time information and allows operation with fewer satellites This mode is well suited to broadcast type installations where the antenna and mainframe do not move Mobile mode recalculates both the position and time each second This allows for compensation of velocity and acceleration so the frequency and timing information stay correct while moving at the expense of some stability This mode is required if the antenna and mainframe are moving For applications where the position changes occasionally but where the antenna and unit are not moving then either mode may be applicable Mobile mode may boot up faster since it does not need to average 60 fixes to establish a fixed location However fixed mode can run with fewer satellites once the position is stored ACQUIRE POSITION Press the ENTER button to erase the saved position and then acquire and save a new averaged position Note that the signal quality might indicate low or no signal during this process NOTE The module must
89. 0 7 00 1080 23 98p 562 37 0741 7 00 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 15 AGL7 Analog Genlock Module Table 3 3 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals cont Format name Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns 720 60p 375 22 2222 7 00 720 59 94p 375 22 4444 7 00 720 50p 375 26 6667 7 00 Factory Default Settings The following table shows the factory default settings of the AGL7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 4 AGL7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings GENLOCK SOURCE Internal GENLOCK TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec GENLOCK LOCK LOSS ACTION Go Internal Frequency GENLOCK FRAME RESET CW 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group OUTPUT BLACK 1 FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT BLACK 2 FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT BLACK 3 FORMAT 1080 59 94i SIGNAL Trilevel Sync BLACK x TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator ATG7 Analog Test Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the ATG7 Analog Test Generator module Refer to the follo
90. 0 0 ceeceee eee ene ence ee deene tee eaeenenneenaeenees 2 38 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 1 AG7 module main Menu 0 c cece een ee cee cence ee eee ene en cena eeaeeneneeteeteeeeeneed 3 3 Figure 3 2 AG7 module CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeees 3 4 Figure 3 3 AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu 0 2 cece eeee nent eee eeeeee tee eeeneeeed 3 5 Figure 3 4 AGL7 module main menu 0 cece cee ee ence ne ee eee eee eee ence eeeeeneneeneeeneeneeneed 3 9 Figure 3 5 AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu 0 cecceee eee cee ene eeeeeeeeeeeeeneetaeeaeeas 3 10 Figure 3 6 AGL7 module OUTPUT submenu ccc ccc cece ence eee cence ene e eee ents eeennees 3 12 Figure 3 7 AGL7 module SIGNAL submenu 00s cee ceec eee e eee ne ene eneeeeeeaeeeeneetaenaeeas 3 13 Figure 3 8 AGL7 module TIMING submenu ccc ccc cece eee ee eens een ee ene e ease ene eeneennees 3 14 Figure 3 9 Front panel test signal buttons 00 0 cece cee cence neces ee eneeneeeeeeeeneeneeeaenaeeas 3 19 Figure 3 10 ATG7 module main MENU cece cece cece eee ene e eee e een nee eet nee teenies 3 21 Figure 3 11 ATG7 module SELECT OUTPUT submenu ccc cece ese eee eect eee eneene ees 3 22 Figure 3 12 ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu 0 cecceceece eee eneeeeeeeteeeaeees 3 23 Figure 3 13 ATG
91. 00 UTIL NET SETUP DHCP Enable Enabl 1 gt Disable TG700 UTIL NET SETUP IP ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 lt gt Set the IP address 1 gt Set the subnet address TG700 UTIL NET SETUP BRDCAST ADDR 000 000 000 000 TG700 UTIL NET SETUP GATEWAY ADDR 000 000 000 000 V Figure 2 23 NETWORK SETUP submenu Set the broadcast address lt gt Set the gateway address DHCP Enables or disables the TG700 to receive IP address settings using the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol service on your network Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection If you select Disable in this menu you will need to set address values in each of the following menu items NOTE Under some network environments the TG700 might not be able to get the IP address automatically from a DHCP server In this case you need to enter the appropriate address value in each submenu item Refer to your network administrator or to the user documentation supplied with your network server operating system OS for detailed information about DHCP server functions TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 27 Operating Basics 2 28 IP ADDRESS Sets the IP address of the TG700 When no value is set the default value is used If DHCP service is enabled the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is used instead of th
92. 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 87 DVG7 Digital Video Generator AUDIO GROUP Submenu Use this menu to perform the following tasks m Enable or disable the embedded audio of the selected audio group m Select which audio channel to enable Set the emphasis status bits sampling alignment status bits and sample bits of the selected audio group Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the AUDIO GROUP submenu Select any of the audio groups in the AUDIO EMBEDDED main menu DVG x AUDIO GRP 1 Disable Status Enable Enable DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 ala x Channel 1 3 To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 4 CANCEL DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 be EMPHASIS Emphasis NO EMPHASIS CCITT Frame M ci rele Frame without Frame Number Asynchronous DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 24 bits Resolution 24 bits 20 bits Figure 3 48 DVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu Sta
93. 1 the loss is only 5 5 dB 100 ft This correlates to an allowable length of 130 ft for the small cable to over 300 ft for the larger cable A booster amplifier can be added if more length is needed as shown in the optional block in the signal path system See Figure 3 53 If a 20 dB amplifier is added then 20 dB more cable loss can be accommodated This equates to another 150 ft of small coax or 360 ft of large coax Although the GPS7 input and most of the other components are 50 Q either 50 or 75 Q cables can be used in most installations The reflections from the impedance mismatch will not cause significant changes in the system because the signal is narrow band and the cable loss is usually many dBs However you should not mix short cable lengths of different impedances as this might create reflections with the potential to cause signal degradation Amplification The GPS7 provides either 3 3 V or 5 V DC power to drive the amplified antenna and booster amplifier The power is carried on the same coax as the GPS signal and can be turned off if the antenna is powered by a separate supply When you are designing the antenna system check the voltage and current requirements of the components to insure compatibility The location of the booster amplifier is important It needs to be before the second length of cable shown in the simplified antenna system diagram If the booster amplifier is placed just before the GPS7 then the signal
94. 1 20 ID TEXT submenu 3 57 LOGO submenu 3 56 Main menu 3 53 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 53 3 54 Operating procedure 3 50 OVERLAY submenu 3 54 Product description 3 49 Rear panel connectors 2 8 TIMING submenu 3 54 3 60 VIDEO submenu 3 54 3 62 Index 2 BG7 BLACK 1 connector 2 8 BLACK 2 connector 2 8 BLACK 3 connector 2 8 BLACK 4 connector 2 8 Factory default settings 3 73 Functional checks 1 21 Main menu 3 66 Operating procedure 3 65 Product description 3 64 Rear panel connectors 2 8 SELECT FORMAT submenu 3 67 SELECT OUTPUT submenu 3 66 SELECT SIGNAL submenu 3 68 TIMECODE submenu 3 70 TIMING submenu 3 69 Black Generator See BG7 C CAL OVEN submenu 2 29 Calibration Gain 3 100 Internal oscillator frequency 2 29 3 100 Cleaning 2 43 Exterior 2 44 Clock Select conflict messages 2 16 Configuration GPS7 module 3 100 hardware installation 1 5 Connectors Rear panel 2 3 Crossover Ethernet cable 2 31 D Description product overview 1 1 Diagnostic routines 2 29 DIAGNOSTICS submenu 2 29 Digital Video Generator See DVG7 DVG7 AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 3 89 Audio click 3 90 3 228 AUDIO GROUP submenu 3 88 BLACK 1 connector 2 9 BLACK 2 connector 2 9 BLACK submenu Option BK only 3 94 CIRCLE submenu 3 87 EDH insertion 3 93 Embedded audio 3 74 3 88 Factory default settings 3 95 Functional checks 1 23 ID TEXT submenu 3 85 LOGO submenu 3 84 Main me
95. 1 Field Cyan 2 Field Magenta 1 Field Magenta 2 Field Yellow 1 Field Yellow 2 Field Grid Checkerboard Aspect Ratio PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window TIMING SDI SDI Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Use this button to select the converter mode of operation and Embedded audio selection menu See page 3 206 Selecting the Converter Mode Setting the Gradient Starting Point When you select Horizontal Gradient or Vertical Gradient in the Linearity projector test pattern set use the up A or down arrow button to set the starting point of the gradient The available values are as follows Horizontal Gradient 16 to 1913 in 1 level steps Vertical Gradient 16 to 2880 in 1 level steps 2048 x 1080 format 16 to 2404 in 1 level steps 2048 x 1556 format TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 205 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator Selecting the Converter Mode 3 206 Select from the following converter modes when you want to convert the SMPTE 292M 4 2 2 serial digital signal applied to the HD SDI IN connector into a dual link output format 60 59 94 or 50 Hz Progressive Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input interlace signal 601 59 941 or 501i to a progressive signal by doubling the frame rate The input signal is copied to both Link A and Link B but the payload identifier is modified to indicate a dual link signal The results are a 4 2 2 YCbCr 10 bit signal at the fa
96. 1080 30p 1080 50i 1080 59 94i 1080 60i 1080 50p 1080 59 94p 1080 60p 2048x 1556 format 2K 1556 14 99sF 2K 1556 15sF 2K 1556 17 98sF 2K 1556 18sF 2048x 1080 format 2K 1080 23 98sF 2K 1080 24sF 2K 1080 25sF 2K 1080 29 97sF 2K 1080 30sF 2K 1080 23 98p 2K 1080 24p 2K 1080 25p 2K 1080 29 97p 2K 1080 30p 1 No SMPTE 352M identification payload is added to the output of 2048 x 1556 format signals Perform the following steps to select the signal format CAUTION The HDLG7 module does not generate a Clock Select warning message when a signal format change creates a clock conflict with the output s of other modules using the HD clock If you change the signal format of the HDLG7 output you may create a clock conflict that will cause the output of another module to no longer conform to its selected signal format See page 2 16 Clock Conflict Messages 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDLG x STATUS 100 Color Bars 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes to show the currently selected signal format as shown below TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator HDLG7 X SELECT FORMAT 1080 59 94 Current 3 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select the Test Signal
97. 10b X X X X X X X X Table 3 23 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level A 2K x 1080 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf XYZ 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X GBR X X X X X X X X X X 3 146 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Table 3 24 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X YCbCr A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 25 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 2K x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf XYZ 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X GBR X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 26 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 27 HD3G7 Generato
98. 157 Zone Plate Pattern Control Parameters ccc cece cece eee ee ence ee eee eee ene eneaeeneennaes 3 160 Zone Plate Dependent Parameters 0 c cece cece ene eee eee resres ee ene eee eee n eaten ennaes 3 162 Using Zone Plate Signals ossen enr n a e E nane nenusensnadsbdoesrenierea neon S 3 169 HD3G7 Module Main Menu ceccecce a o a a E a a 3 170 Factory Default Settings cd 7 soeccasnds bited e EE E E E E E 3 197 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator ccc ccc ccc een eee e cnet ene neat ene ennaes 3 199 Product DesGriptionins scusctsaviauxecace dens e e a tate Paneauiae es ooneddaleeuevendeeraabareeaede 3 199 Operating Procedures ijinecsnisdesaneswieveseanncetiesasachiaissmuiecehls lsaesaaeans aeneeceigisansseeetes 3 200 Selecting an Output Signal 0c cece ec ka K iann aN EEE nnn ene Eee 3 201 HDLG7 Module Main Menu 00 ceccecce cece ene eee eee ea eens en eeeeeeeeeneeteeeaeenennenees 3 208 Factory Default Settings joc scccccneras Joo leksePeisuas costes teas catwls done ene deus T ERRET E 3 212 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 1 2 0 0 0 cece eee c ence ee eee eee ene en eee eeaeenenee eae enenees 3 213 Product Description cesses ex ccicnnceined EEE E EEE EESE A EEE EEEE 3 213 Operating Procedures e csisssavandsceaunor dur ANAA EE EAA EEEE E ANTEE AA EEEE 3 214 Selecting an Output Signal cccccceeceeneeeeeeeeeeeenesenesesesetecetesnnesgeeenesenesnnens 3 215
99. 2M dual link mapping as described by SMPTE 425 or HD SDI Within Level A and Level B there are also selections for 1920 x 1080 2K x 1080 and 1280 x 720 Level A only formats Also for Level B only there are selections for 2xHD 1920 x 1080 and 2xHD 1280 x 720 formats The 2xHD mode produces two standard HD streams in the same format e g 1080 Select between Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black for the two streams See page 3 176 OUTPUT MODE Submenu SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH When the output mode is set to a non fast progressive format the SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH menu is available There are several sample structures to choose from Press the left lt 4 or right arrow buttons to scroll through the available options When the desired sample structure is displayed press the ENTER button to select it 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line RGB 444 12b e YCbCr 444 10b RGB 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b RGBA 444 10b e YCbCr 422 12b e YCbCr 444 12b YCbCrA 422 12b Level B mapping only 3G fast progressive format 1080 line e YCbCr 422 10b 3G formats 720 line RGB 444 10b YCbCr 444 10b e RGBA 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b 2xHD formats 1080 and 720 line e YCbCr 422 10b 2K line formats XYZ 444 12b RGB 444 12b HD format e YCbCr 422 10b ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Selects the data to be placed on the alpha channel when a sample structure that includes an alpha channel is selected The channel can contai
100. 3 147 Table 3 25 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 2K x 1080 c ccc ccc ec cence eee eeaeees 3 147 Table 3 26 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 2XHD 1080 0c cece cece cence eee eee 3 147 Table 3 27 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level B 2xHD 720 00 cc cece cece eee ee eee eeneees 3 147 Table 3 28 HD3G7 Generator mode HD SDI 1920 x 1080 ccc ccc cece cece eee e ee eaeees 3 147 Table 3 29 HD3G7 Generator mode HD SDI 1280 x 720 c ccc ccc cece eee en eee eeeeneeenees 3 147 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Table of Contents Table 3 30 HD3G7 Converter mode 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 formats c cece eeee es 3 148 Table 3 31 HD3G7 Converter mode 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 cece cece eee ee eee eee eeees 3 148 Table 3 32 HD3G7 Converter mode 3G Level B 2XHD 1920 x 1080 cece cece e eee ees 3 149 Table 3 33 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons 0 ceceeeeee 3 151 Table 3 34 Zone plate pattern control parameters 0 2 c cece eee ence cence eeeneeee tae eneenees 3 161 Table 3 35 HD3G7 module factory default settings c cece cence eee e nee e eee ene eeneeeaeennees 3 197 Table 3 36 HDLG7 module signal formats 0 c ccc c cece ete ene eee een e eee eee ene ene ene ennaes 3 202 Table 3 37 HDLG7 module HD test signal set assigned to the test signal b
101. 3G7 module main Menu 0 c cece cece cece e cence een e ceed ee eee seen nett eee 3 171 HD3G7 module main menu Continued c cece ence eee e eee eee ene ene sean ees 3 172 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 83 HD3G7 module STATUS menu in generator mode eceeee eee ece eee eeeeeees 3 175 Figure 3 84 HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu 0 cececee cece eee eeeeeeeneen ees 3 176 Figure 3 85 HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 177 Figure 3 86 HD3G7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu e cece eeeeeeeneee ees 3 178 Figure 3 87 HD3G7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu ccceceee eect eeeeeeeeees 3 179 Figure 3 88 HD3G7 module TIMING submenu 0 0 c cece cece ence cence eenetee eae eneeaees 3 181 Figure 3 89 HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu 00 ece cece ee cence eneeneeee eae eneenees 3 182 Figure 3 90 HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu 0 2 cceeeeee cece ne ee eee eeeenetee tee eneen ees 3 184 Figure 3 91 Ancillary Payload submenu ccc cece ence eee essers ss ene nent eee e ene ene ennaes 3 187 Figure 3 92 Ancillary Payload submenu Continued 00 ece eee eceeeee cee ee ee tee eee eneeaees 3 188 Figure 3 93 AFD code 1001 for a 16 9 coded frame 2 2 0 0 ec ecce cence eect nee ne eee eaeeneenees 3 192 Figure 3 94 HD3G7 modu
102. 4 or 20 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator Operating Procedure After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe N Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display 9 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the DVG7 module main menu appears as shown below DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars 5 Select the signal format and the test signal you want to output See page 3 76 Selecting an Output Signal Sal Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to DVG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 79 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 75 DVG7 Digital Video Generator Selecting an Output Signal Select the Signal Format 3 76
103. 59 94p 720 50p Black Burst Same as BLACK 2 TIMING Adjusts the timing offset for the output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal When you select this menu item and press the ENTER button you will access the TIMING submenu where you will select the timing offset See page 3 14 You cannot set the timing offset under the following conditions m When HD SYNC Same as BLACK 3 is selected as a format for the BLACK 2 output When Black Burst Same as BLACK 2 is selected as a format for the BLACK 3 output SIGNAL Submenu Use this menu to select the black burst signal for the NTSC NTSC No Setup and PAL formats Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the black burst signal and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the SIGNAL submenu From SELECT FORMAT submenu for BLACK 1 or BLACK 2 NTSC and NTSC No Setup PAL i mi TENISE lt gt Black Burst Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst No Field REF Figure 3 7 AGL7 module SIGNAL submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 13 AGL7 Analog Genlock Module The available choices described below depend on which format you select When the NTSC or NTSC No Setup format is selected the signals listed below are available Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF When the PAL format is selected the signals listed below are available Black Bur
104. 7 When you select OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 you will access the GPO submenu for the selected output See page 3 138 DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 3 139 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 115 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module REFERENCE Submenu 3 116 Use this submenu to select the timing reference and the response for a loss of lock to the timing reference The following figure shows the REFERENCE submenu Select REFERENCE in the main menu Interna GPS Signal A lt gt l NTSC Burst with 10 FieldID REF IN PAL Burst only HD SYNC REF IN only To GENLOCK TIMING submenu GPS x REFERENCE GENLOCK TIMING Se gen GPS7 x REFERENCE LOSS LOCK ACTION Stay Current Frequency Jam Phase GPS x REFERENCE GPS HOLDOVER RCVRY lt ps Fast Slew Stay Legal Stay Legal gt Go Internal Frequency Stay Current Frequency 1970 199 Figure 3 56 GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the reference source for the module timing Select one of the following references and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection GPS Signal Uses the GPS signal input as the timing reference Internal Uses the internal clock frequency setting as t
105. 7 Audio Generator Module AG7 Module Main Menu Channel 1 AG7 x RESOLUTION 20 bits AG7 x AUDIO VIDEO SYNC Free Run AG x CHANNEL PARAMETERS Use the AG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Select the audio channel whose parameters are to be changed Select the audio data resolution Select the frame reset signal to be synchronized Select the timing offset for the audio signal outputs Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 ENTER Channel 4 To CHANNEL submenu Channel 5 Channel 6 CANCEL Channel 7 Channel 8 24 bit lt I bis Free Run lt gt Frame Reset 1 Frame Reset 2 To AUDIO TIMING submenu CANCEL Figure 3 1 AG7 module main menu CHANNEL PARAMETERS Selects the channel for which the parameters are to be set from Channel to Channel 8 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to make the selection Press the front panel ENTER button to access the CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu where you can set frequency amplitude and audio click insertion See page 3 4 RESOLUTION Sets the resolution of the serial digital audio signal data Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are 24 bits or 20 bits Press the ENTER button to enab
106. 7 module ID TEXT submenu 0 cece cece cence eee e ence eee e eee ents eneennees 3 24 Figure 3 14 ATG7 module TIMING submenu eccecc ence ee eee ene ene eee eeaeeeeneeteeeaeas 3 26 Figure 3 15 ATG7 module APL submenu 2 ccecce nce ee eee eee eee ene ene eeeeeaeeeeneeeaenaeeas 3 27 Figure 3 16 Front panel test signal buttons 0 sce cce cence ee eee cee ene ene eeeeeaeeeeneeneeeaeeas 3 32 Figure 3 17 AVG7 module main Menu 0 e cece eee e cee nee ne eee eee ee ene eneeeeeeaeeeeneenaeeaeeas 3 36 Figure 3 18 AVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ccceeceee eee eee eneeeeeeaeees 3 38 Figure 3 19 AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu ccecceee eee eee eee eneeeeeeaeeeeneeteeeaeeas 3 39 Figure 3 20 AVG7 module LOGO submenu 00 sce cceec ence ee ene ene eneeeeeeeneeneetaeeaeeas 3 40 Figure 3 21 AVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 00 c cece cece cence eee e ence nesses eens eeneennees 3 4 Figure 3 22 AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 0 ce ccecc ence ee ene ene eneeeeeeeeeeeneetaenaeeas 3 43 Figure 3 23 AVG7 module TIMING submenu ccccec cee ee cence eee e ene e nese e sents eneennees 3 44 Figure 3 24 AVG7 module VIDEO submenu ccs cceee ence ee eee ene eneeeeeeaeeeeneetaeeaeeas 3 45 Figure 3 25 AVG7 module APL submenu 2 sce cce nce ne eee eee eee ene eneeeeeeaeeeeneetaenaeas 3 47 Figure 3 26
107. 700 TV Signal Generator Platform The TG700 platform must be running version 3 1 or later software The module is a 30 MHz bandwidth video signal generator which provides wideband analog component video signals for HDTV systems The module provides the following features m Supports the following system formats 1080 60i 1080 59 941 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 50p 720 24p and 720 23 98p NOTE Signals for the following system formats are preinstalled in the mainframe 1080 60i 1080 59 94i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 720 60p and 720 59 94p Signals for additional system formats are included on the TG700 Software Library CD ROM that is supplied as a standard accessory Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to download signal files from the CD ROM to the TG700 m Six analog component video outputs E Outputs a frame picture created by the Frame Picture Generator application when 64 MB of memory is installed See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements m Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 49 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator Operating Procedure 3 50 m Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Full remote control using Ethernet interface After the module is
108. AVE Saves the current instrument settings to one of the 14 available presets Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the destination preset and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection RENAME Renames the selected preset Perform the following steps to rename a preset 1 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the preset you want to rename 2 Press the ENTER button twice to begin editing the preset name The underscore character _ appears under the first letter of the preset name 3 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character to the letter you want to modify 4 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the new character The available characters include the full alphabet numerals from 0 to 9 and many standard ASCII symbols The text strings may contain up to 32 characters 5 Enter all of the desired characters then press ENTER button 6 Press the CANCEL button twice to exit the PRESET submenu This returns to the top of the mainframe main menu 7 Press the ENTER button to reenter the PRESET submenu 8 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the SAVE menu item 9 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the preset name edited in step 2 10 Press ENTER button to save the preset with the new name DELETE Deletes the specified preset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select t
109. Basics Figure 2 28 Top cover removal 4 Locate the connectors J000 J002 J004 J006 and J008 on the A10 MAIN board See Figure 2 29 gt Front J700 Ti J630 fr J620 rd J610 rf 4 J600 J000 J002 J004 JO06 J008 Figure 2 29 Location of the mainframe GPI connectors on the A10 MAIN board 2 34 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPI labe Operating Basics 5 Move all of the jumpers from pins 1 2 to pins 2 3 The following table shows the jumper settings of the connectors and their function NOTE To enable the GPI be sure to move all of the jumpers to pins 2 3 Table 2 2 Mainframe GPI jumper settings on the A10 MAIN board Jumper illustration Jumper setting Function J000 J002 J004 J006 J008 J000 J002 J004 J006 J008 All of the jumpers short pins 1 2 LAN Ethernet factory default settings All of the jumpers short pins 2 3 GPI GPI Do not connect to Network After you move the jumpers replace the top cover on the instrument Reinstall the screws securing the top cover to the instrument Remove the protective backing from the GPI label p
110. E ATC LTC Disable i lt gt gt _ Enable Disable ATC LTC timecode HD3G x TIMECODE ATC VITC f lt Enable Disable ATC VITC timecode Disable 4 Only available with no GPS7 module when a GPS7 is installed the initial time set function is controlled from the GPS7 menu on y available with GPS7 module 3Non integer frame rates only 1970 238 Figure 3 89 HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu 3 182 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices PROGRAM TIME Uses the program time counter as the timecode m TIME OF DAY Uses the time of day as determined by the GPS7 module This selection is available only if a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument Press ENTER to apply initial time Press the Enter button to apply the initial time Initial time is set in the next menu item This selection is available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument When a GPS7 module is installed it controls this function Initial Time Use this menu selection to set the Initial Time Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to adjust the time Press the ENTER button to confirm the time This selection i
111. E A J HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x CHANNEL x A V V CANCEL To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Frame lt gt Frame without Frame Number Asynchronous HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x ing Frame Samp 1970 236 Figure 3 86 HD3G7 module AUDIO EMBEDDED submenu 3 178 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator STATUS Use this menu to enable or disable the embedded audio output for the selected group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select ENABLE or DISABLE and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection CHANNEL Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to choose channel 1 2 3 or 4 and then press the ENTER button to enter the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu The CHANNEL submenu allows you to set the frequency amplitude click rate and channel origin ID for the selected audio channel The following figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select CHANNEL in the AUDIO submenu HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CHx Status Active A gt Set the status ENTER J lt gt Set the frequency V HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x Frequency 1000 Hz HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x Amplitude 20 dBFS HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x CH x Audio Click OFF lt q gt Set the amplitude lt gt Set the click rate ENTER z lt q gt Set the channel origin CANCEL
112. E BAR 2T Pulse and Bar Two pulses of 2T half amplitude width and full scale amplitude A positive pulse is added to a base level at the minimum valid value and a negative pulse is added to a bar level at the maximum valid value The 2T pulse is used for Short Time response testing and the bar is used for Line Time response testing Color Pulses Eight color pulses of 2T half amplitude width upon black and white backgrounds The upper half of the pattern has positive pulses on a black background testing each combination of the three color channels The lower half of the pattern has a white background so negative pulses are used to result in the same line colors For example the yellow pulse in the upper half is 100 red plus 100 green resulting in yellow on a black background At the same horizontal location in the lower half a pulse of 100 blue added to the white background also results in a yellow line TIMING Co siting Pulse Full amplitude pulses on a black background These pulses are each one sample wide and without sine squared shaping so the pattern is not legal for broadcast It is used to verify timing and alignment between the three channels SDI Equalizer Test Full field equalizer test pattern per SMPTE RP 198 1998 This pattern consists of alternate 10 bit words 300h and 198h regardless of the current sampling structure and format For 10 bit 4 2 2 YCbCr HD SDI formats the Y samples carry the 198h words
113. ER HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE To MOVING PICTURE submenu CANCEL ENTER HD3G7 x AUDIO EMBEDDED To AUDIO submenu GROUP 1 CANCEL ENTER HD3G7 x TIMING To TIMING submenu CANCEL HD3G7 x a _ ee CANCEL TIMECODE A V 1970 253a Continued on the next page Le OA Only available in A sample structure mode for 3G formats 2 Only available in 2xHD output mode Figure 3 81 HD3G7 module main menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 171 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator From previous page ROCA VIDEO ENTER HD3G7 x To VIDEO submenu tg CANCEL HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD ENTER To ANC PAYLOAD submenu ers CANCEL HD3G7 x SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD a Enable d HD3G7 x TRIGGER OUTPUT m System Clock d ENTER HD3G7 x SECONDARY OUTPUT To SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu Test Pattern d CANCEL HD3G7 x DIAGNOSTICS a To DIAGNOSTICS submenu La i A V 3 ENTER HD3G7 x CALIBRATION To CALIBRATION submenu CANCEL 3 Only available in factory mode 1970 239b Figure 3 82 HD3G7 module main menu Continued 3 172 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator STATUS Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample structure See page 3 175 STATUS OUTPUT MODE Selects the mapping format of the output signal to Level A direct image format mapping Level B SMPTE 37
114. ER button you access the PRESET submenu See page 2 19 SEQUENCE Selects and executes a sequence program loaded into the TG700 Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the SEQUENCE submenu See page 2 21 FRAME RESET STATUS Displays the status of the frame reset signals Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu See page 2 22 Refer to Frame Reset Signals for detailed information about the frame reset signals See page 2 15 UTILITY Sets the system related settings such as network parameters and signal sets assignment to the front panel test signal buttons Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the UTILITY submenu See page 2 23 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics PRESET Submenu Use this menu to recall instrument settings saved as a preset or save the current instrument settings to a preset Use the up lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the menu items See Figure 2 17 The following three presets are named at the factory and can be used for your own application Power On Default Use this preset to save instrument settings that you want automatically loaded when the TG700 powers on If one of the seven presets is selected in the mainframe GPI General Purpose Interface that preset takes precedence over this Power On Default preset You cannot assign this preset name to another pre
115. Enable or Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the choice NOTE Different video modes and formats have different ranges of lines and pixels in their active and ANC spaces Users should be careful to change the line field and sample offset parameters of the ANC insertion feature after changing video modes or formats to be sure the ANC data is programmed as desired If the line number or sample offset are left at values outside the allowed range for a given format the packet will not be inserted in the stream Alternatively if these parameters are left at values near the end of active or ANC space the packet may overwrite other elements of the stream such as EAV and SAV Line Use this menu selection to set the line to carry the ancillary payload Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in progressive formats Field Use this menu selection to set the Field to carry the ancillary payload Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Field 1 Only Field 2 Only or Field 1 and 2 This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats Field 1 Line Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 1 to carry the ancillary payload Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats Field 2 Line Use this menu selection to set the line i
116. G7 Analog Test Generator Check module is functional Required equipment NTSC PAL waveform monitor m 75 Q BNC cable E 75 Q terminator NOTE If the software version of your TG700 mainframe is version 1 3 or earlier you must upgrade the software of the mainframe before using the ATG7 module Refer to the TG700 technical reference for the procedures Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 Module Installation and Removal 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes SIGNAL output 5 Use the 75 Q BNC cable to connect the SIGNAL connector to one of the input connectors on the waveform monitor rear panel 6 Use the 75 terminator to terminate the other loop through connector on the waveform monitor rear panel 7 Press the front panel MODULE button until the ATG7 main menu shown below appears ATG x STATUS NTSC No Setup SMPTE Color Bars 8 Press the front panel FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC or PAL 9 Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal 10 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal 11 Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color ba
117. GPI output Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the delay time before a GPO signal warning message is displayed An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Black 2 Blank on Unlock Use this feature to set a delay between the time when an unlock is detected and when Black 2 is blanked Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the delay time before the BLACK 2 output is blanked for a loss of GPS signal lock An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE The BLACK 2 output must be configured to be blanked before this delay will be used See page 3 119 BLACK Submenu LTC Submenu Use this menu to configure the LTC outputs Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the LTC sub
118. HDVG7 Mod le Main Men secere raresssi renerne ee en En EE E iE 3 217 Factory Default Settings ccrnenmeiinrnnne a i aa aa 3 233 Index Index TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual iii Table of Contents List of Figures iv Figure 1 1 Installing the rackmount hardware ecceceeceeeee nee ee eee eee ene eneeneeeaetneneenaes 1 6 Figure 1 2 Placing the TG700 in the rack 0 cee cece eee ce ene eee ene en tenet eee ee eee eneeneeeaeeaenee es 1 7 Figure 1 3 TG700 slot numbering 00 eee eee cee cence ee eee eee ene encenceeeeeetee ee eneeneeneeerens 1 10 Figure 1 4 Removing the blank panel 0 0 c cece ccc eee ene eee nen enn e nee eet nee eee en ated 1 11 Figure 1 5 Installing the module 0 ccc ccc ccc cece ene enn n r r nee etn een EE ea 1 11 Figure 1 6 Securing the module s 65sccerevencsereaeenensacuseeedacsiulewne E EEE E 1 12 Figure 1 7 Removing the module 0 ceccecce nent eee ee eee ene en ene eeeeenee ee enenneenaeeeees 1 13 Fig r 2 1 TG700 front panelerna e aE E T EE E EE E E don eeaels 2 1 Figure 2 2 G00 rear panel csc ididdiasacceacntobsnee a N a N esas 2 3 Figure 2 3 AG7 module connectors ccc cece eee eee nen ene enn E nee ent EEE ee E EEE EES 2 4 Figure 2 4 Location of J452 on the AG7 module ccc cece cece cece eee eee e nee ene enna eenaennee ens 2 4 Figure 2 5 AGL7 module connectors 0 cece cence eee e
119. IAGNOSTICS Submenu Use this menu to execute the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and installed modules The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu Select DIAGNOSTICS in the UTILITY submenu TG700 UTILITY DIAGNOSTICS ENTER ee ee ee Press ENTER to Proceed xecute the alagnosiic routines Figure 2 24 DIAGNOSTICS submenu A CAUTION When you execute the diagnostic routines be sure to save the current instrument settings to a preset After the diagnostics is completed reboot the instrument and then recall the saved settings Press the ENTER button to execute the diagnostic routines note that the GPS7 module has its own diagnostics submenu running the diagnostics here does not run the GPS7 diagnostics If all of the diagnostic routines are completed without any errors the instrument will display Pass If a diagnostic error is displayed contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative NOTE The front panel buttons are disabled until the diagnostic routines are completed CAL OVEN Submenu This menu can be accessed in regular or factory mode When the instrument is in regular mode you can access the internal frequency calibration which can be performed while the instrument is in service When the instrument is in factory mode you can access the internal frequency calibration and you can characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage The latter characterization is only availab
120. IGGER OUTPUT lt ba Frame Field Pulse Line Pulse 1970 227 Figure 3 94 HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu System Clock The system clock is an internal parallel rate clock a low frequency clock related to the pixel rate of the video signal Frame Field Pulse The trigger pulse is produced at the field or frame rate of the video signal In interlaced and segmented frame formats this produces a frame rate square wave that is low during field one and high during field two In progressive formats the output is high during the vertical blanking period producing a field rate pulse Line Pulse The trigger pulse output is high during the horizontal blanking period producing a line rate pulse 1 The Frame Field Pulse and Line Pulse signals are derived from the EAV and SAV XYZ byte H V and F bits just prior to the parallel data entering the serializer therefore these pulses can be used to approximate the signal timing SECONDARY OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between a Test Signal or a Submenu Black output for the secondary Signal 2 BNC connector and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When set for a Test Signal the Signal 2 output is the same as the Signal 1 output When set to Black the black signal is the same format and sample structure as the Signal 1 output TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 193 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator
121. IRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu Disable Enable HDVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE ere ee X Position 0 0 APH et the horizontal position HDVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position HDVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 106 HDVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X Position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 225 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator AUDIO GROUP Submenu Use this menu to perform the following tasks m Enable or d
122. L LCD display 2 1 Mainframe main menu 2 18 Mainframe memory requirements 1 2 Manual description xvii Manuals related xviii Memory requirements 1 2 Menu control buttons 2 2 Module Installation 1 9 Removal 1 9 MODULE button 2 1 Modules AG7 Audio Generator 3 1 AGL7 Analog Genlock 3 7 ATG7 Analog Test Generator 3 17 AVG7 Analog Video Generator 3 29 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 49 BG7 Black Generator 3 64 DVG7 Digital Video Generator 3 74 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module 3 97 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 143 HDLG7 HD Dual Link video generator 3 199 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 3 213 N NETWORK INFORMATION submenu 2 26 NETWORK SETUP submenu 2 27 2 31 O Operating basics 2 1 Optional accessories 1 3 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Options International power cords 1 4 Option BK Serial Digital Black Output for HDVG7 module 1 4 Option CB NTSC PAL Color Bars signals for BG7 module 1 4 Option D1 Calibration Test Data Report 1 3 Option FP Frame Picture Generator 1 4 Product documentation 1 4 P Power connector 2 3 Preface xvii PRESET submenu 2 19 Product Description 1 1 R Rackmount installation instructions 1 5 Reference indicator 2 2 Related Manuals xviii Removal Module 1 9 S Safety Summary x SD clock conflicts 2 16 Select clock messages 2 16 SEQUENCE
123. LE button until GPS7 appears Use the up A or down arrow button to select LTC Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select LTC 1 Press the ENTER button Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 30 fps drop frame Press the ENTER button Use the up A or down arrow button to select Source Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Time of Day Press the ENTER button 7 Check that the time of day is correctly updating on the WFM7120 timecode display 8 Repeat this procedure for LTC 2 at 30 fps 9 Repeat this procedure for LTC 3 at 25 fps 10 Repeat this procedure for LTC 4 at 24 fps GPI output 1 Check that the antenna signal is connected to the antenna input of the module and that the instrument shows the signal is locked a b c Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears Use the up A or down arrow button if needed to select STATUS Check that the top line of the status display shows Locked 2 Connect the GPI 1 output to the voltmeter a b Connect the BNC to Banana plug adapter to the voltmeter Connect the LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC GPI DSUB on the back of the GPS7 module Connect the GPI 1 connector on the breakout cable to the BNC to Banana plug adapter TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 31 Getting Started 6 Configure the GPI 1 output to be assert
124. LINK OFFSET submenu Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 2020 us to 0 2020 us in 0 0135 us steps NOTE You can reset the offset value to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously MOVING PICTURE Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal Submenu up down or left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu aN Set the sample number to be scrolled Set the line number to be scrolled Set the frame period to be scrolled Random Disable Enable yy Figure 3 99 HDLG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 211 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change th
125. MB of memory you can upgrade your mainframe to 64 MB by ordering the following upgrade kit 040 1698 xx Contact your local Tektronix representative for more information International Power Plug The following international power plug options are available Options Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt AO North America power standard Al Universal EURO power A2 United Kingdom power A3 Australia power A4 240 V North America power A5 Switzerland power A6 Japan power A11 India power AC China power Production Documentation The following product documentation options are available Options Opt LO Printed English user manual m Opt L5 Printed Japanese user manual TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Initial Product Inspection Perform the following product inspection procedure when you receive your instrument 1 Inspect the TG700 shipping carton for external damage which may indicate damage to the instrument 2 Remove the TG700 from the shipping carton and then check that the instrument has not been damaged in transit Prior to shipment the instrument is thoroughly inspected for mechanical defects The exterior should not have any scratches or impact marks NOTE Save the shipping carton and packaging materials for instrument repackaging in case shipment becomes necessary 3 Verify that the shipping
126. NAL 2 connectors output the same test signal HD3G7 Module Connectors _ _ E _ 2 12 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics HDLG7 Module Connectors The HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator is equipped with five BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 HDLG7 module connectors HD SDI IN Input connector for an HD SDI 4 2 2 video signal that you want to be upconverted NOTE Each pair of connectors LINK A and LINK B output the same signal E LINK A Outputs the selected HD SDI dual link video test signal or an upconverted version of the signal on the HD SDI IN connector m LINK B Outputs the selected HD SDI dual link video test signal or an upconverted version of the signal on the HD SDI IN connector TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 13 Operating Basics HDVG7 Module Connectors The standard HDVG7 Digital Video Generator module is equipped with two BNC connectors to output serial digital video signals Option BK adds two additional BNC connectors to output serial digital black signals See Figure 2 15 HDVG7 Figure 2 15 HDVG7 module connectors Option BK NOTE The SIGNAL I and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal and the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors output the same black signal SIGNAL 1 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal m SIGNAL 2 Outputs the selected serial
127. NONE lt gt Reacquire Position JAM Sync 1970 208 Figure 3 72 GPS7 module GPI submenu Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select from the following settings E NONE Disables the GPI input Reset Program Time Resets the Program Time counter Reacquire Position Reacquires the GPS signal At least 60 readings from four satellites are required to establish and save a new averaged position Jam Sync When in GPS mode performs an immediate jam sync which can also be done from the JAM SYNC submenu See page 3 131 When in VITC time mode performs an immediate jam sync and sets the instrument time from the input timecode Both actions require that the input timecode has been valid for 100 continuous frames In VITC mode this input is equivalent to executing set commands from both the Jam Sync menu and the Time of Day synchronize function TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 137 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 138 GPO Submenu Use this menu to select which alarm will trigger a signal output on the selected GPI output The output is an open collector with a weak pull up so when it is asserted the output will be low The following figure shows the GPO submenu Selection by the MODULE button NONE GPS Signal Warning 0 No Signal Loss of lock lt gt Alarm Time 00 00 00 Near Loss of Genlock REF IN ee No Genlock Detected only GPS7 x GPO OUTP
128. NTSC SMPTE Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 APH TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 ns VIDEO CONFIGURATION CH1 2 3 Composites GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels GIY ON B Pb B Y ON R Pr R Y ON SCH PHASE 0 deg APL MODE APL OFF PERIOD 1 0 s TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module AWVG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 8 AWVG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 20 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module Product Description The AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG
129. O EMPHASIS CD or CCITT Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Sampling Sets the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Frame Frame without Frame Number or Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Resolution Sets the resolution of the audio signal data for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between 24 bits and 20 bits Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AUDIO CHANNEL Use this menu to set the frequency amplitude and audio click of the embedded Submenu audio signal for the selected audio channel Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select any of the channels in the Channel AUDIO GROUP submenu HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Frequency 1000 Hz HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Amplitude 20 0 dBFS HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Audio Click OFF Figure 3 108 HDVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Inactive 300 Hz 1200Hz 4000Hz 12000 Hz Silence 400 Hz 1500Hz 4800Hz 15000Hz 50 Hz 500 Hz 1600 Hz 5000Hz 16000 Hz lt gt 100 Hz 600 Hz 2000Hz 6000Hz 20000 Hz 150 Hz 750 Hz 2400Hz 8000 Hz 200 Hz 800 Hz 3000Hz 9600 Hz 250 Hz 1000Hz 3200Hz 10000 Hz lt gt 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS OFF 1 sec lt gt 2sec 3sec 4 sec TG700 TV Si
130. OVERLAY BLINK Lr Figure 3 19 AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 40 ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 41 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 43 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay m Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 39 AVG7 Analog Video Generator LOGO Submenu 3 40 Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the display position of the logo Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO subme
131. PANYING DOCUMENTATION SHOULD BE RETURNED PROMPTLY TO TEKTRONIX FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE LICENSE FEE PAID FOR INFORMATION REGARDING THE RETURN OF PROGRAMS ENCODED OR INCORPORATED WITHIN EQUIPMENT CONTACT THE NEAREST TEKTRONIX SALES OFFICE DEFINITIONS Tektronix means Tektronix Inc an Oregon corporation or local Tektronix legal entity that is supplying the equipment Program means the Tektronix software product executable program and or data enclosed with this Agreement or included within the equipment with which this Agreement is packed Customer means the person or organization in whose name the Program was ordered LICENSE Customer may 1 Use the Program on a single machine at any one time 2 Ifthe Program is provided in connection with a floating user license the Program may be used on multiple machines provided that the user is authorized and the total number of users at any one time does not exceed the total number of licensed concurrent users 3 Modify the Program or merge it with another for use on the single machine and 4 Copy the Program for archival or backup purposes provided that no more than one 1 such copy is permitted to exist at any one time If the Program is provided in connection with a floating user license the Program may be copied onto multiple machines for use by authorized users Each copy of the Program made by Customer must include a reproduction of any copyright notice o
132. Pattern Gamut Test Grey Window White Window PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse and Bar T Pulses TIMING Timing 2 5 MHz Bowtie 500 kHz Bowtie Active Picture Timing Co Siting Pulse SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Other Chroma Freq Resp Color Palette FCC Composite FCC Multiburst NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite 625 270 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Colour Bars 75 Colour Bars 100 Colour Bars Over Red 75 Colour Bars Over Red LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 3 Channel Ramp 5 Step B Y Valid Ramp Limit Ramp Modulated Ramp Oversize Ramp R Y Valid Ramp Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Y Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep SinX X MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Convergence Pattern Gamut Test Grey Window White Window PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T 4T 10T Pulse amp Bar 2T 4T 20T Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing 2 5 MHz Bowtie 500 kHz Bowtie Active Picture Timing Co Siting Pulse SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Other CCIR 17 CCIR 18 CCIR 330 CCIR 331 CCIR 331 G2 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator DVG7 Module Main Menu Use the DVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the logo text or circl
133. Perform the following steps to select a zone plate signal for output Signal Press the SWEEP test signal button to enter the zone plate signal menu Once you enter the zone plate signal menu the HD3G7 generator module will start to output the displayed zone plate signal The dot in front of the signal name on the second line of the display indicates the selected default signal 2 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a zone plate signal from the provided six standard zone plate signals Circle Diagonal Horizontal Sine Horizontal Sweep Vertical Sine or Vertical Sweep or from the two user defined signals Custom 1 Zoneplate or Custom 2 Zoneplate The zone plate signal whose name is displayed will continue to be output until a different signal is selected even if you press the CANCEL button If you select a different signal such as a color bar signal and then press the SWEEP button again the last displayed zone plate signal will be shown as the default and will again be the output signal Modifying a Zone Plate There are times when a specific test case requires a modified zone plate signal Signal By making and saving changes to the zone plate parameters you can create a new signal that is based on the selected signal and then save that new signal Changes you make affect only the new signal the standard zone plate signal used as a basis for the new signal is not changed Before making changes make sure y
134. R button to save the current settings TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator ID TEXT Submenu Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Status Enable Disabl lt I gt Ere AWVG X Po x OVERLAY TEXT sition 0 0 APH lt gt Set the horizontal position AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT EDIT AWVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 31 AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu lt gt Set the vertical position A 1 gt Edit text V Save the text to the signal file Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use t
135. R button to confirm the selection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay m Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 83 DVG7 Digital Video Generator LOGO Submenu Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the display position of the logo Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG700 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu DVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO X Position 0 0 APH lt gt Set the horizontal position DVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Y Position 0 0 APH lt gt Set the vertical position DVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF DVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters V Figure 3 45 DVG7 module LOGO submenu 1 gt Select OFF or a logo Save the display position for the logo X position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow
136. ROUP submenu Group 1 Group 3 Group 4 CANCEL HDVG7 x TIMING L To TIMING submenu i ma CANCEL ENTER j HDVG7 x TIMECODE To TIMECODE submenu CANCEL ENTER HDVG7 x VIDEO ooo To VIDEO submenu a Mda CANCEL ENTER HDVG7 x BLACK OPTION CANCEL Figure 3 101 HDVG7 module main menu 3 218 To BLACK submenu Option BK only 1970 192 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 220 OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle that is overlaid on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 221 AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the output test signals Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the items and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 226 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 229 TIMECODE S
137. S Press the ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu appears Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC or PAL Press the ENTER button The SELECT SIGNAL submenu appears Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 100 Color Bars Press the ENTER button to enable the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started 31 Set the waveform monitor to view the color bars signal 32 Check that the appropriate color bars signal appears AVG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the AVG7 Analog Video Generator Check module is functional Required equipment Waveform monitor m 75 Q BNC cable Procedure Install the module into the TG700 Platform mainframe See page 1 9 a Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed E Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display gt Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes un Press the front panel MODULE button until the AVG7 main menu shown below appears AVG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a format and then press the ENTER button D Pa Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal 90 Press the CANCEL button to display t
138. S7 Timecode generator with VITC GPS7 and BG7 with LTC GPS7 and with ATC HDVG7 when a GPS7 module is installed Timecode generator with ATC HD3G7 with or without a GPS7 module Dual link SDI generator and converter HDLG7 3 Gb s SDI video generator and converter HD3G7 Independent setting of amplitudes frequencies and audio clicks of 16 channel embedded audio signal DVG7 and HDVG7 Independent setting of amplitudes frequencies and audio clicks of embedded audio signal up to 32 channels HD3G7 Circle logo and text overlays on test signals DVG7 and HDVG7 Zone plate signals HD3G7 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 1 Getting Started Moving picture generation function by scrolling the active area of the signal DVG7 HD3G7 HDLG7 and HDVG7 m User defined ancillary data payload HD3G7 m Reference generator performance level m Ethernet interface for remote control and downloading various files such as signal files logo files and preset files A signal library software application packages and product documentation are included in the standard accessory DVD to execute the following operations Upload and download files such as signal files logo files and preset files Download the signals from the signal library to the TG700 Create a logo logo file to be inserted into the test signal Create a frame picture file using the generation of a picture or test pattern Mainframe Me
139. S7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module ALARM DELAY Submenu 3 134 Use this menu to set delays for warning messages Setting a delay allows short errors and warnings to be ignored For example with the holdover capability a short GPS unlock will not cause any disruption in the syncs so there is no reason to immediately register an error and trigger an ECO to change Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the ALARM DELAY submenu Select ALARM DELAY menu in the main menu r 4 gt lt 1 gt gt Edit delay gt lt lt gt Edit delay gt x lt 1 Edit delay V Figure 3 69 GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu GPO Loss of Lock Use this feature to set a delay between the time when loss of lock is detected and when it is reported on the GPI output Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the delay time before a GPO loss of lock warning message is displayed An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change GPO Signal Warning Use this feature to set a delay between the time when a signal warning is detected and when it is reported on the
140. SDI Video Generator 3 164 K 2 Parameter Display name KX 2 H Sweep Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Kx H Sweep parameter sets the increase or decrease in the horizontal frequency as a function of position along the video line When Kx alone is applied the result resembles a common sweep test signal Again use a waveform monitor to look at all the video lines to see the effects of Kx2 When Kx is 0 0 setting Kx to 9 will result in the line waveform changing from DC to 9 c aph in the width equal to one active picture height As with Kx the ending frequency will depend on the aspect ratio of the active video format For example in a 16 9 format with a Kx of 9 0 a Kx coefficient of 9 0 will cause the waveform to increase to DC in one aph The frequency will continue to increase to approximately 7 0 c aph by the end of the line Use this formula to calculate Kx and Kx terms for a sweep with the DC point at mid screen Kx 4Raspect x Kx where Raspect 18 the aspect ratio width height of the active format The Horizontal Sweep zone plate H Sweep is a Kx only zone plate See Figure 3 78 Figure 3 78 A Kx2 only zone plate TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Kyy Parameter Display name KXY V Ch H Freq Units c aph per active picture height c aph The Kxy V Ch H Freq parameter sets the change in h
141. SMPTE RP219 Color Bars refers to SMPTE RP219 Color Bar I Q Even 2 Not available in 2K format mode of operation 3 204 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is configured to output projector test patterns The table also lists the native XYZ projector test patterns that correspond to digital cinema Table 3 38 HDLG7 module projector test pattern set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars Color Bar Patch 1 Color Bar Patch 2 LINEARITY Linearity Step Black White Step Black Dark Gray Horizontal Gradient Vertical Gradient FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Flat Field White Flat Field Black to White Step 1 Black to White Step 2 Black to White Step 3 Black to White Step 4 Black to White Step 5 Black to White Step 6 Black to White Step 7 Black to White Step 8 Black to White Step 9 Black to White Step 10 Black to Gray Step 1 Black to Gray Step 2 Black to Gray Step 3 Black to Gray Step 4 Black to Gray Step 5 Black to Gray Step 6 Black to Gray Step 7 Black to Gray Step 8 Black to Gray Step 9 Black to Gray Step 10 MULTI BURST SWEEP a MONITOR Monitor Red 1 Field Red 2 Field Green 1 Field Green 2 Field Blue 1 Field Blue 2 Field Cyan
142. Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTER button to save the current settings TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator ID TEXT Submenu Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Status Enable AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT X Position 10 0 APH Disabl lt I gt Ere lt q gt Set the horizontal position AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 80 0 APH lt gt Set the vertical position A 1 gt Edit text V Save the text to the signal file AVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 21 AVG7 module ID TEXT submenu Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left
143. Settings cocosii e aE E E E E A 3 73 DVG7 Digital Video Generator 0 ccc esi pna EAE ENE EA EEE ea 3 74 Product Desorption ece aenea E E EEEE EE E eevneedsdeu dayne ence ess 3 74 Operating Procedures lt se2e rooies iiion E E E E o TETERE E E RE 3 75 Selecting an Output Signal irer rinnan ANE EEEE EAEE EN EEEE S 3 76 DVG7 Module Main Ment sis ccsssccessiescsaavessncwuadesenses a N EEE A NE 3 79 Factory D tault Settings misscse orromon nE E E E REE EE EOS 3 95 ii TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Table of Contents GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module cceeceee eee eneeneeec teases eneeeeeeaeeas 3 97 Product Descriptio niii ne enn a EN E E NE ARAN E EN 3 98 Operating Proced tersoreaicciiir irai EEE A TR EE EA E EA ERN 3 99 Configure the GPS7 Module ceereess cerr ee enee ET E en E E EEEE es 3 100 GPS7 Module Main Menu se ccansisieiieran i iea o EEE E a NEG 3 112 Factory Default Settings o oiscsonere rro inoin EE E ET E OE EE TEA 3 141 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 00 c cece cece ence ence e nee cnet e nee natn nae eneennaes 3 143 Product Descriptio sirios e a bani dehidicastawsthblacdiaehitebaiennhd 3 144 Operating Procedure ssori tceansoreghiineracedun nace doles TO EEO EE E E OTE 3 145 Selecting an Output Signal 0 0 0 cece cece eee enini ce eee tee eee EE EENEN a 3 146 ZONE Plate SiSNAlS sce casawarieweisasguremened adder yen hadeane E EEEE EE E N EEE 3
144. Signal Generator Platform Software Library and 020 2721 xx Product Documentation DVD Packaging Kit Rackmounting hardware 351 0859 00 Power cord Varies by See page 1 4 International Power Plug Options option TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Service Manual e 077 0230 xx Blank rear panel 614 A021 00 LTC and GPI breakout cable GPS7 module only 012 1717 00 The following table lists the options that can be ordered with the TG700 mainframe and modules Table 1 2 Instrument and module options Option Description Instrument Module D1 When you order Option D1 a Calibration Test Data Report is provided with the instrument and or module for which the option is specified TG700 mainframe AG7 AGL7 ATG AVG7 AWVG7 GPS7 HD3G7 HDLG7 HDVG7 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Table 1 2 Instrument and module options cont Option Description Instrument Module BK When you order Option BK two serial digital black signal DVG7 HDVG7 outputs are added to the module CB When you order Option CB 10 field ID and NTSC PAL BG7 color bars signals can be output from the BLACK3 and BLACK4 outputs NOTE Option FP provided extra memory which allowed the TG700 mainframe to support the Frame Picture Generator application This option is no longer necessary for new TG700 mainframes If you have an older mainframe with less than 64
145. Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Cr Turns the Cr component YCbCr format R component GBR format or Z component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Edge Filter Enables or disables the Edge Filter on serial digital video signals that have a filter This control has no effect on signals without a filter Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When the edge filter is enabled certain data transitions between two levels are run through a low pass filter to set rise times pulse widths and to prevent ringing If the filter is disabled the edges will not be filtered The filter should not be disabled in broadcast environments Edge filtering is not necessary in certain environments such as digital cinema applications and several types of picture monitors and projectors In these cases disabling the edge filtering will result in instantaneous level changes for adjacent color bars NOTE Software versions of the HD3G7 module prior to V5 5 included a 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN menu to select projector specific test patterns that had no edge filtering With software version V5 5 this functionality has been replaced by the Edge Filter submenu which can be ap
146. T connector 2 12 TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu 3 193 Using Zone Plate signals 3 169 VIDEO submenu 3 184 Zone Plate Control parameters 3 160 Zone Plate Dependent parameters 3 162 Zone Plate Signals 3 157 Index 3 Index HDLG7 Embedded audio selection 3 207 Factory default settings 3 212 Functional checks 1 36 HD SDIIN connector 2 13 LINK A connectors 2 13 LINK B connectors 2 13 LINK OFFSET submenu 3 211 Main menu 3 208 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 211 Operating procedure 3 200 Product description 3 199 Rear panel connectors 2 13 Selecting the converter mode 3 206 Setting the gradient starting point 3 205 HDTV Digital Video Generator See HDVG7 Index 4 HDVG7 AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 3 227 AUDIO GROUP submenu 3 226 BLACK 1 connector 2 14 BLACK 2 connector 2 14 BLACK submenu Option BK only 3 232 CIRCLE submenu 3 225 Embedded audio 3 214 3 226 Factory default settings 3 233 Functional checks 1 37 ID TEXT submenu 3 223 LOGO submenu 3 222 Main menu 3 217 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 220 Operating procedure 3 214 OVERLAY submenu 3 221 Product description 3 213 Rear panel connectors 2 14 SIGNAL 1 connector 2 14 SIGNAL 2 connector 2 14 TIMECODE submenu 3 230 TIMING submenu 3 229 VIDEO submenu 3 231 Initial product inspection 1 5 Inspection 2 43 Exterior 2 43 installation rackmount instructions 1 5 Installation 1 5 hardware 1 5 Module 1 9 K Key features 1 1
147. TATUS menu Refer to the TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for a listing of the supported input and output format combinations for the HDLG7 module 3 Select the converter mode to provide a dual link signal 4 Press the front panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item or submenu Use this mode to generate either HD SDI video test signals or projector test patterns digital cinema 2K formats only 1 Select the signal format for the output signal See page 3 202 Select the Signal Format 2 Select the test signal that you want to generate See page 3 203 Select the Test Signal 3 Press the front panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item or submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 201 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator Select the Signal Format 3 202 The following table lists the available signal formats NOTE Framing resynchronization occurs when the signal format is changed Selecting the 1080 50p 1080 59 94p or 1080 60p format forces the sampling structure to be set to YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits Selecting a 2K 1080 or 2K 1556 format will limit the sampling structure to either RGB or XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits Refer to SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH for more information See page 3 209 Table 3 36 HDLG7 module signal formats 1980 x 1080 format 1080 23 98sF 1080 24sF 1080 23 98p 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 29 97p
148. TC VITC 1 Output Disable Line Number 14 VITC 2 Output Disable Line Number 16 BLANK No ON GPS UNLOCK Black 2 only TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 141 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Table 3 20 GPS7 module factory default settings cont Submenu Menu item name item name Settings GPS SETUP Antenna Power Off Position Fixed Acquire Position Press Enter to reacquire Fixed Position Signal Warning threshold 6 Locked gt TIME SETUP SELECT TIME OF DAY menu MENU Source GPS Signal Internal 2008 01 01 00 00 00 TIME ZONE OFFSET menu 00 00 DST SCHEDULE menu Enable Off PROGRAM TIME menu Setup Initial Time 00 00 00 JAM SYNC menu Enable ON LEAP SECOND menu Setup Scheduled Time 00 00 00 ALARM TIME menu Enable Off Setup Alarm Time 00 00 00 ALARM DELAY menu GPO Loss of Lock 00 00 10 GPO Signal Warning 00 00 10 Black 2 Blank On Unlock 00 00 10 SELECT LTC LTC 1 TYPE 30 fps drop frame LTC 2 SOURCE Time of Day LTC 3 OFFSET 00 00 00 00 LTC 4 TIMING Delay 0 00 ms OUTPUT Level 2 0 Volt LEVEL SELECT GPIO INPUT 1 Trigger Select None OUTPUT 1 Alarm Select None OUTPUT 2 3 142 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module Refer to
149. TER m Group Group 3 To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 4 CANCEL DVG7 x BLACK AUDIO EMBEDDED Group 1 DVG7 x BLACK TIMING DVG7 x BLACK VIDEO To VIDEO submenu Figure 3 52 DVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only FORMAT Selects the format of the output serial digital black signals Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select 525 143 525 270 or 625 270 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection SIGNAL Selects the serial digital black signal to output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Black serial digital black 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field and 100 Flat Field Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital black signals Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the groups and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 88 3 94 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital black outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 91 VIDEO Sets the resolution and EDH insertion of the serial digital black signals Select this m
150. TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual FOUCAULT AA Tektronix 071 1970 04 S TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual This document supports software version 5 5 and above www tektronix com Tektronix 071 1970 04 1 Copyright Tektronix All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14150 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support In North America call 1 800 833 9200 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Warranty Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product Parts modules and replacement products used by
151. TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value within 1 2 frame for 525 270 and 625 270 formats and from 1 to 1 frame for 525 143 format in 1 line steps Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock 37 0 ns for 525 270 and 625 270 formats 69 8 ns for 525 143 format steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 91 DVG7 Digital Video Generator VIDEO Submenu 3 92 Use this menu to perform the following tasks Turn each serial digital video component Y Pb or Pr on or off individually Turn the insertion of the EDH Error Detection and Handling on or off Set the resolution of the serial digital video signals to 8 or 10 bits Turn the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select V DEO in the main menu A A DVG x VIDEO Pr ON DVG7 x VIDEO Resolution 10 bits DVG7 x VIDEO EDH ON DVG7 x VIDEO Y ON V DVG7 x VIDEO Pb ON A V y D
152. Tektronix for warranty work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance All replaced parts modules and products become the property of Tektronix In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increa
153. To SELECT FORMAT submenu BG7 x BLACK 1 TIMING BG7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE Selection by the MODULE button CANCEL BG7 x SELECT OUTPUT wo x BLACK 2 BLACK1 lt I gt prack3 BLACK 4 To TIMING submenu To TIMECODE submenu 1970 184 CANCEL GPS7 module only Figure 3 35 BG7 module main menu SELECT OUTPUT Selects the output for which parameters are to be set The choices are BLACK 1 BLACK 2 BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the desired output and then press the ENTER button to access the SELECT FORMAT submenu See page 3 67 3 66 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual BG7 Black Generator SELECT FORMAT Use this menu to set the signal format for the selected output The following Submenu figure shows the SELECT FORMAT submenu NTSC ENTER BG7 x BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTSC No Setup NTSC PAL To SELECT SIGNAL submenu HD SYNC CANCEL Figure 3 36 BG7 module SELECT FORMAT submenu NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock will occur Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the signal format The choices are NTSC NTSC No Setup PAL and HD SYNC Select HD SYNC to output an HDTV trilevel sync signal After you select the signal format press the front panel ENTER button to access the SELECT SIGNAL submenu where you can select the output signal See page 3 68 After you s
154. ULE button until the HDLG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDLG7 x STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bar 1080 59 94i GBR 4 4 4 12 bits A S Configure the module to the desired operational mode converter or generator select the signal format and if necessary select the test signal See page 3 215 Selecting an Output Signal Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to HDLG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 208 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator Selecting an Output Signal Converter Mode Procedure Generator Mode Procedure The HDLG7 module has two modes of operation converter or generator To select an output signal perform the appropriate procedure below for your selected mode of operation Use this mode to convert a SMPTE 292M serial digital video stream carrying a SMPTE 274M signal to a SMPTE 372M serial digital dual link video signal 1 Connect an HD SDI signal to the HD SDI IN connector 2 Select the signal format for the output signal See page 3 202 Select the Signal Format NOTE To avoid an input signal error select the output signal format that matches the input signal If the input signal format does not match the selected output format the following message appears Input Format mismatch Check FORMAT on the S
155. UT X ALARM SELECT NONE Figure 3 73 GPS7 module GPO submenu Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the following settings NONE Disables the selected GPI output m GPS Signal Warning lt Figure of Merit level gt Output goes high when the GPS signal quality reaches the warning level set in the GPS SETUP submenu See page 3 124 Refer to GPS Signal Quality Figure of Merit for more information about GPS signal quality levels See page 3 105 Loss of Lock Output goes low when a GPS or genlock loss of lock occurs A loss of lock alarm is triggered when the GPS signal falls below the user defined threshold after the delay time has been exceeded Alarm Time A time of day or counter alarm is triggered for one second when the specified time is reached on the specified counter Near Loss of Genlock Output goes low when the genlock frequency is near the end of the oven oscillator tuning range This can happen if the input signal is too far from the correct frequency This could also indicate that the oven oscillator is near its end of life and the TG700 needs to be serviced No Genlock Detected Output goes low when no Genlock signal is detected NOTE The GPIO alarms are active for the currently selected reference For example GPS specific alarms assert only if GPS is the selected reference and the same for Genlock specific alarms If the selected reference is Internal then only the Alar
156. Use this menu to perform the following tasks Set the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output m Enable or disable the signal output of each channel Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a GBR signal is being output Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu Select VIDEO in the main menu AVG x VIDEO CONFIGURATION CH1 2 3 Composites AVG x VIDEO GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels AVG x VIDEO G ON AVG x VIDEO B ON AVG x VIDEO R ON AVGY7 x VIDEO SCH PHASE 0 deg Figure 3 24 AVG7 module VIDEO submenu al Ie Ie I gt lt I gt lt gt TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual CH1 Y CH2 C CH3 Composite CH1 2 3 Composites Sync ON Green Sync ON All Channels ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 180 deg to 180 deg 3 45 AVG7 Analog Video Generator 3 46 CONFIGURATION Sets the configuration of the output channels Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between CH1 Y CH2 C CH3 Composite and CH1 2 3 Composites When you select CH1 Y CH2 C CH3 Composite a Y signal C signal and composite signal are output from the CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors respectively When you select CH1 2 3 Composites a composite signal is output from each output connector Press the ENTER button to con
157. V HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x LINK x Channel Origin A1 1 1970 237 Figure 3 87 HD3G7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Status Use this menu to set the status of the individual channel Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select between Active Inactive and Mute Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection m Frequency Use this menu to set the frequency of the Embedded Audio signal from 10 0 Hz to 20 kHz in steps of 0 5 Hz Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode then use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button again to confirm the new frequency TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 179 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 180 Amplitude Use this menu to set the audio amplitude from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in steps of 1 dBFS Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to set the amplitude and then press the ENTER button to confirm it m Audio Click Use this menu to set the audio click rate to one click every one two three or four seconds or turn the click off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the click rate and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Origin Use this menu to set a channel origin ID of up to four ASCII characters Use the left lt 4 and
158. VG7 x VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF lt d lt gt lt gt lt l gt ed lt gt Figure 3 51 DVG7 module VIDEO submenu ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 10 bits 8 bits ON OFF OFF ON TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator Y Turns the Y component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pb Turns the Pb component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Pr Turns the Pr component of the serial digital video signals on or off Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Resolution Sets the resolution of the serial digital video signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between 10 bits and 8 bits Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection EDH Turns the insertion of the EDH Error Detection and Handling information on or off on the serial digital video signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AV timing mode Turns the output mode for an audio video timing measurement on or off
159. VG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 60 TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the output signal relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu AWVGY x TIMING 1080 59i E EEEE Vertical 0 Line 6 1 gt Set the vertical timing in 1 line steps AWVG7 x TIMING 1080 59i Horizontal Coarse 0 000 msec lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps AWVGY x TIMING 1080 59i Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 0 1 ns steps V Figure 3 33 AWVG7 module TIMING submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously The adjustment range of the timing offset settings depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 11 on page 3 61 Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 frame of the selected signal format in 1 line steps Horizontal coarse Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line of the selected s
160. When the GPS7 is genlocked to NTSC or PAL the Vertical Interval Timecode on the genlock reference input can be decoded and used as the time source This time can be viewed on the status bar and is used as the time source for all the time code outputs Since the phase of the video signals are set by the genlock the epoch system does not operate from the VITC input Time Setup Selection The possible Time code sources depend on the selected Reference source If GPS signal is the selected reference source then GPS or internal time is available If Genlock is the selected reference source then VITC or internal time is available If Internal is the selected reference source then internal time is the time code source If VITC is the time code source then the time synchronization Mode needs to be set There are three choices Synchronize now sets the time when the user presses the ENTER button if the incoming time is valid and stable Synchronize once sets the time once when a valid and stable time code is detected Follow sets the time every time a new stable and valid time is detected Master Time The Master Time is the basis for all timecode outputs and for the phase reference of all video outputs Leap Seconds Leap second information is stored and then updated by satellite every 20 to 30 minutes Offset to TAI TAI is the International Atomic Time represented as the number of seconds since the epoch of 0 00 00 January 1 1958 Proposed st
161. Y signal on or off for a composite signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component GBR component or composite and the output channel configuration SCH PHASE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the SCH phase for a composite signal You can set the value from 180 degrees to 180 degrees in degree steps This setting is not saved as a preset NOTE If you try to set the SCH phase over 180 degrees the value jumps to 179 degrees Also if you try to set the SCH phase under 180 degrees the value jumps to 179 degrees TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator APL Submenu Use this menu to set the APL and Bounce parameters for the test signal outputs Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the APL submenu Select APL in the main menu APL OFF AVGT x lt APL MODE High APL APL OFF Low APL APL Bounce Bounce AVG7 x APL PERIOD Ve Set the bounce period Figure 3 25 AVG7 module APL submenu MODE Sets the output mode of the APL signal Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the mode and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The choices are APL OFF Outputs the
162. You can use the menus to independently set the format and timing of the three black outputs and to enable VITC to be applied to the output signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 11 Operating Basics The HD3G7 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module provides four BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 13 HD3G7 A TRIGGER SIGNAL 2 1970 181 Figure 2 13 HD3G7 module connectors SIGNAL 1 Outputs the selected HD SDI serial digital video test signal or an upconverted version of the input signal on the SDI IN connector SIGNAL 2 The Signal 2 output can be configured to output a test pattern where it produces the same output as the Signal output or to output a Black signal in the same format as the Signal 1 output See page 3 193 SECONDARY OUTPUT Submenu SDI IN Input connector for an HD SDI 4 2 2 video signal that you want to be upconverted TRIGGER Outputs a selected signal The available choices for output are system clock 148 5 MHz frame field pulse once per video frame or field or a line pulse once per video line When an interlaced format is selected the frame field pulse selection produces a frame rate square wave trigger output which is low during field one and high during field two The frame pulse selection produces the once per field pulse for all other formats NOTE When the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection is set to Test Pattern the SIGNAL 1 and SIG
163. a Words to follow and the User Data Words UDW comprise the actual payload carried in the ancillary data The HD3G7 module addresses User Data Words 000 through 254 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator The following figures show the ANC PAYLOAD submenu Select ANC PAYLOAD in the MAIN menu HD3G x ANC PAYLOAD Output Disable HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Parity Automatic a gt Set the payload output lt gt Set the payload parity 7 lt 1 gt gt Setthe data ID A HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD SDID 0x01 ENTER lt gt Set the secondary ID V CANCEL HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD DC 0x01 1 lt gt Set the data count ENTER 4 gt Set the UDW V A HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Clear UDW V Clear entire UDW Clear entire UDW ENTER HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD CS 0x00 Auto 0x202 lt q Le Set the checksum V lt gt Enable Disable checksum auto calculation lt gt Select line for ANC Payload HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Select field structure Field 1 Only lt gt i i Continued on the next page 19702358 KA Figure 3 91 Ancillary Payload submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 187 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator From previous page HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Field 1 Line 9 lt gt Select field structure HD3G7 x ANC PAYLOAD Kl lt
164. abled Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu See page 2 42 2 40 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics GPI ALARM SELECT submenu Use this menu to select which mainframe GPI alarms are enabled or disabled Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu Select GPI ALARM SELECT in the UTILITY submenu TG700 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT Fan Fault Disable TG700 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT No Signal Disable TG700 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT Loss of Lock Disable TG700 UTILITY GPI ALARM SELECT Near Loss of Lock Disable A J 1970 194 The GPI ALARM SELECT submenu contains the following selections Disable lt gt Enable Disable lt q gt Enable Disable lt gt Enable Disable lt gt Enable Fan Fault Enables or disables the mainframe GPI alarm when the fan stops working Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection No Signal Enables or disables the mainframe GPI alarm when a genlock signal is not connected Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection Loss of Lock Enables or disables the mainframe GPI alarm when
165. active picture height 4 While the pattern control parameter is displayed you can use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to modify it This will modify the signal while maintaining the basic pattern NOTE Press the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons at the same time to reset any parameter 5 Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the parameters menu which for the predefined signals starts with it s unique pattern control parameter as shown in the table above and then continues through the list of dependent parameters At each parameter whether it s a pattern control parameter or a dependent parameter you can use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to modify it 6 When you are done altering parameters scroll to the Save As selection at the bottom of the menu and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select User Custom 1 or User Custom 2 7 Press the ENTER button to save the modified signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 159 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Zone Plate Pattern Control Parameters NOTE Zone plate variations can be sinusoidal square or triangular These discussions of zone plated parameters will refer to sinusoidal variations for convenience Zone plate patterns are made up of sinusoidal variations in luminance with the peaks of the sine waves resulting in white areas on the video screen and the wave
166. ality and the processes that occur as the instrument progresses through the states needed to lock on to the GPS signal The FOM provides a simple scale to evaluate the state of the GPS lock The FOM drives the external reference indicator LED on the front panel of the mainframe When in internal mode the external LED is off When in external mode and the FOM is gt 6 the LED is steady green When the FOM is lt 6 the LED is flashing green The FOM provides the scale by which you can set the signal warning threshold See page 3 138 GPO Submenu You can see the description of the FOM in the GPS7 STATUS menu The following table lists the figures of merit and their descriptions Table 3 17 Figures of merit for signal quality Figure of merit FOM Indicator Description 0 No signal This means that no usable satellite signals are detected This is normal for a short time after the signal is applied but if it lasts more than a minute or so then it usually means one of the following that there is a problem in the antenna or cable the antenna is blocked from direct line of sight to the satellites or the power is not getting to the antenna 1 Low signal This means that some signal is detected but that the signal quality is too low for extraction of useful timing or position information This is a normal situation for a short duration but if it persists the causes are likely to be similar to those for FOM state 0 2 A
167. an enter a time offset of up to 23 59 59 29 maximum frame value depends on the frame rate of the video signal of the GPS timecode hours minutes seconds video frames Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for you offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change 30 DROP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to enable or disable the 30 Drop mode Use this mode to correct for frame rate error in NTSC rate signals or to allow the timecode to run continuously and drift away from the correct time VITC Allows inserting the same VITC signal on 1 or 2 lines of the vertical interval Select VITC 1 for one line and VITC 2 for the second line Select the VITC signal you want to configure and then press the ENTER button to enter the VITC submenu for the selected signal See page 3 72 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 71 BG7 Black Generator 3 72 VITC Submenu GPS7 module only Use this menu to enable or disable the output of the VITC signal and to select the video line on which the VITC signal will be inserted Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the
168. and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Power disconnect The power cord disconnects the product from the power source Do not block the power cord it must remain accessible to the user at all times Do not operate without covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Do not operate with suspected failures If you suspect that there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Avoid exposed circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do not operate in wet damp conditions Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere Keep product surfaces clean and dry Provide proper ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual General Safety Summary Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Symbols and Terms onthe These terms may appear on the product Product m DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury haz
169. and the Cb Cr samples carry the 300h words resulting in a magenta shaded field for this pattern For other formats these same 10 bit word values will result in different color representations This pattern also includes the polarity control word such that the first sample in the active picture in every other frame is 190h instead of 198h PLL Test Full field phase locked loop test pattern per SMPTE RP 198 1998 This pattern consists of alternate 10 bit words 200h and 110h regardless of the current sampling structure and format It appears as a 24 gray field in 10 bit 4 2 2 YCbCr formats but as different colors in other formats SDI Matrix Matrix pattern with the equalizer test pattern 300h 198h in the upper half of the field and the PLL test pattern 200h 110h in the lower half of the field OTHER s TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual For 3G output formats only Use this button to select the converter mode of operation Press any other test signal button to return to generator mode operation See page 3 148 Select the Converter Mode 3 155 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Install the Enhanced Signal 3 156 Sets In addition to the factory installed signal sets there are enhanced signal sets available for the FLAT FIELD button on the HD3G7 module These signals are located on the 7G700 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your instrument Perform the following ste
170. andard SMPTE 404M defines the SMPTE Epoch at that same moment There are exactly 8040 days and 19 leap seconds between the SMPTE Epoch TATI and the GPS Epoch 3 108 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Epoch Calculations The number of seconds since the SMPTE Epoch is used to precisely align video frames with the Master Time clock For example an NTSC system operates at 29 97 frames per second 30 fps 1 001 so there are precisely 30 000 frames every 1001 seconds By knowing the total number of seconds since the SMPTE Epoch when all video frames were perfectly aligned the GPS7 module can determine where the GPS pulse per second signal is located with respect to video framing Frame Engine The frame engine supplies frame pulse signals based on the SMPTE Epoch to each video output This ensures that they are properly aligned with respect to the calculated phase for the selected video format of each output Output Timing Each video output has an independent offset that can be specified to shift that output in order to align the video and LTC signals in the studio This time adjustment does not affect the timecode that is applied to that output the signal and timecode stay together as the timing is changed The timing offset range and resolution depend on the signal See the specific output menu for details Leap Second Information The GPS signal indicates the number of leap seconds
171. ard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product The following symbol s may appear on the product A CAUTION Protective Ground Refer to Manual Earth Terminal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual xi Service Safety Summary Service Safety Summary xii Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock switch off the instrument power then disconnect the power cord from the mains power Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Compliance Information This section lists the EMC electromagnetic compliance safety and environmental standards with which the instrument complies EMC Compliance EC Declaration of Meets intent of Directive 2004 108 EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Conformity EMC Compliance wa
172. ars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Ramp Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multiplus SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 75 Red Field PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X TIMING SDI OTHER Other CCIR 17 CCIR 18 CCIR 330 CCIR 331 UK ITS 1 UK ITS 2 PAL 2 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Modulated 10 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Ramp Shallow Ramp Ramp Modulated Pedestal FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor Convergence Monitor Setup Matrix 100 Red Field 75 Red Field White Window Safe Area PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X TIMING a SDI a OTHER Other ITS Matrix 1 UK 1 Line ITS 525 Beta format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 33 AVG7 Analog Video Generator Table 3 8 AVG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signal set Signals in the signal
173. asurement control and laboratory use Test and measuring equipment TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Compliance Information Safety Class Class 1 grounded product Safety Certification of The safety certification is valid only when installed in an appropriately approved Plug in Modules by a USA NRTL or a Canada Certified Organization mainframe Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminants that could occur in the environment around Description and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Products in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent
174. ation where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe N Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display a After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the BG7 module main menu appears as shown below BG7 x SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 5 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to BG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and submenu items See page 3 66 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 65 BG7 Black Generator BG7 Module Main Menu Use the BG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks m Select an output to format Set the format of the selected output m Select the test signal for the selected output Set the timing offset for the selected output m Set timecode parameters for the selected output when a GPS7 module is installed The BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed The following figure shows the BG7 module main menu
175. ator Platform User Manual 2 23 Operating Basics 2 24 VERSION INFO H W Displays the hardware version of the mainframe and the installed modules Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the module for which you want to display the hardware version VERSION INFO F W Displays the firmware version number of the mainframe and the installed modules Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the module for which you want to display the firmware version SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Assigns signal sets to the front panel test signal buttons If your mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed this menu selection also assigns a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the OTHER test signal button See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu See page 2 25 LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD display Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to decrease or increase the display contrast FRONT PANEL DISABLE Sets the time out period until the front panel buttons are disabled Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select from the following choices OFF 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 30 Minutes and 1 Hour Press the ENTER button to enable the selection When you select any of these time out periods except OFF the front panel buttons are disabled when that time passes w
176. available signals changes depending on the selected signal format Table 3 8 AVG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set NTSC and NTSC No Setup formats COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ramp Shallow Ramp Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst Black Burst with Field ref 0 Flat Field NTSC only 10 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multiburst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 60 Sweep 100 Sweep Chroma Frequency Response MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern Gray Window 100 Red Field 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 75 Red Field Monitor Setup White Window Safe Area TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator Table 3 8 AVG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X TIMING SDI OTHER Other FCC Composite FCC Multiburst Matrix 1 NTSC Combination NTC7 Composite SNG Color Bars PAL 1 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color B
177. aved saath creeds tanmeeedtedion EE ea 3 28 AVG7 Analog Video Generator 66 ccc cece ccc ene e ene ence ne eee nee teen Etna e en ne eas 3 29 Product Descriptio esaiar ioi eanaaesavelccewnaedal da dagsduleweaaetaeadice ou coe rda eae awereaddeds 3 29 Operating ProCedure iciccdiscisaddasidcnan cus bhoneddlunhtccindestnbhiaahiaidbinnadd wud E 3 30 Selecting an Output Signalcc cc sccesesseccccceevesaedennceernevccededesbaedsededs specssldeveeeeds cused 3 31 AVG7 Module Main Menu cccece eee iuisssst is ranss tiro reiii ionian EEE EEEE E 3 36 Factory Detault Settings sreronereesprgro rnin re EE E E EEE EEE 3 48 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator ccc cce ec ce eee eseese errer rs rrr ena e ene enaeenneenaes 3 49 Product Description v caaccciccanndoiind hese E ARE EE A EAE EEEE EANN EE A 3 49 Operating Procedure encsieeien dedan eir Eo en EE EEEE TEE EEEE 3 50 Selecting an Output Signal asserisce cenere eei anaE En EEEE EEE ERE RS 3 51 AWVG7 Module Main Menu oeccsrsccccircssssccirnsissicerenssses iei incesi ennei 3 53 Factory Default Settings ssserren earen eena EEN EEEE A EEN E E E 3 63 BG Black Generator ii cicnauntedecinaihiind aa e ded N Aia 3 64 Product Deseriptio ni iessen eenn EEE TEE E E EE EEE E E S EES 3 64 Operating Procedure sc lt isc2dstesens cele drasecseeati RER E E GTER E E E ORR EA 3 65 BG7 Module Main Men aecvsusciuseckaavetuvennasdauateuseie peeessenteete visas A EEEN NE AANE 3 66 Factory Default
178. aveform monitor Two 1m 3 ft BNC to BNC high bandwidth cables Procedure 1 2 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization of all the installed modules is executed Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 33 Getting Started Generator function 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 main menu shown below appears HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press the down arrow button to select Output Mode and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the desired output mode When the desired output mode is displayed press the Enter button to confirm it This example will use the 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 output mode Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 50p then press ENTER Press the COLOR BAR button and select a signal to output Press the CANCEL button to exit the COLOR BARS menu Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Press the up A arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu Press the ENTER button Press the right arrow to scroll through the Diagnostics readouts Check that the PLL Status Fl
179. aveform monitor and then press the ENTER button AGL 1 BLACK 1 NTSC Black Burst 18 30 31 32 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Black Burst then press the ENTER button Connect the BLACK 1 connector to the NTSC PAL waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Press the CANCEL button twice to display the SELECT OUTPUT menu Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 2 then press the ENTER button Repeat steps 17 and 18 Connect the BLACK 2 connector to the NTSC PAL waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Press the CANCEL button twice to display the SELECT OUTPUT menu Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select BLACK 3 and then press the ENTER button This displays the SELECT FORMAT submenu Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 60i and then press the ENTER button Connect the BLACK 3 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Check that the appropriate HDTV trilevel sync signal is displayed TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started ATG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the AT
180. ble the selected signal Which signals are available depend on the selected output connector and the video format The following table lists the available signals for each output connector and video format Table 3 6 Test signals in the ATG7 SELECT SIGNAL submenu Format Test signals BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF Composite Sync Composite Blanking Subcarrier H Drive V Drive Field Reference PAL Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF Composite Sync Composite Blanking Subcarrier H Drive V Drive Field Reference PAL Pulse TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 23 ATG7 Analog Test Generator ID TEXT Submenu 3 24 Table 3 6 Test signals in the ATG7 SELECT SIGNAL submenu cont Format Test signals BARS connector NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF 100 Color Bar 75 Color Bar SMPTE Color Bar 40 Flat Field Other 1 SNG Color Bars Other 2 Monitor Setup Matrix PAL Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF 100 Color Bar 75 Color Bar 100 Color Bar Over Red 75 Color Bar Over Red 40 Flat Field Other 1 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge Other 2 Monitor Setup Matrix Use this menu to edit text that is overlaid on the signal for the SIGNAL and BARS outputs and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following table sh
181. bmenu GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE SOURCE Time of Day GPS x BLACK 1 TIMECODE OFFSET 00 00 00 00 GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE 30 DROP ENABLE DROP FRAME A V GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC VITC 1 V Time of Day lt gt Program Time Disable lt gt Set the offset q E ENABLE DROP FRAME DISABLE DROP FRAME ENTER lt gt VITC 1 To VITC submenu eee MN CANCEL 1970 219 Figure 3 59 GPS7 module TIMECODE submenu NOTE This submenu is available only when NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL is the selected signal format SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices Time of Day Uses the time of day as determined by the time of day menu Program Time Uses the program time counter as the timecode Disable Disables the timecode function for the selected Black output NOTE In addition to enabling the timecode source at least one line must be specified and enabled to carry VITC using the VITC submenu below 3 122 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module OFFSET Use this menu item to set an offset for the selected black output relative to the selected timecode source You can enter a time offset of up to 23 59 59 29 maximum frame value depends on the frame rate of the video signal Press the ENTER button and then use the lef
182. button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTER button to save the current settings 3 84 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator ID TEXT Submenu Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu DVG x OVERLAY TEXT Disable Status Enable gt Enable DVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT X Position 0 0 APH gt Set the horizontal position DVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Postion 0 0 APH Set the vertical position A Pa gt Edit text V Save the text to the signal file DVG x OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 46 DVG7 module ID TEXT
183. c cece cece eee eeeeeeeeees 3 128 GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu 00 cc cc cee ce cee e scenes eens 3 129 GPS7 module PROGRAM TIME submenu 0 0 c ccc cceee ceca scenes enna 3 130 GPS7 module JAM SYNC submenu 0 0 ccc ccc e cence eens eee neeeeeee senna 3 131 GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu 0 ccc cece eee e eens eeeeee eee 3 132 GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu 0 0 0 ccccccccc cece eee eeeaeeeeeee eens 3 133 GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu 0cc ccc cce cence ce aeeeeeeeeeees 3 134 GPS7 module LTC submenu ccc cece cece eee E E eens ee eee senna 3 135 GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu 00 cece ence cence cena scenes eneees 3 137 GPS7 module GPI submenu 0 c cece cece cece e cence cent cent eee ee etna 3 137 GPS7 module GPO subMmenu 0 cece ccc cee eee enn e eens eee e cnet teens 3 138 GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 0 0 cece cece cece cece eee eeeeee eee 3 139 Front panel test signal buttons 0 cee ce eee nce nee eee eee eee e eee nee eae ees 3 151 Optical zone plates enlarged 0 cece cece ence e ne ene e ene eee ees 3 157 A Ky only Zone plate e Se RE a a RE E E 3 163 A Kzonly zone plate oes scrin sce csiaaitee E TER ETA E EAEE 3 164 A Kyonly Zone platessa e ain a a a a pS a e 3 165 A Kyconly Zone plates renei nea or a EE E a E T AA deal 3 166 HD
184. carton contains the basic instrument all modules you ordered the standard accessories and any optional accessories that you ordered listed in the table See Table 1 1 Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative if there is a problem with your instrument or if your shipment is incomplete Mainframe Installation This section provides installation information for the TG700 mainframe Hardware Installation The TG700 is shipped with the optional modules that you ordered already installed and configured You can add or remove modules as necessary for your application See page 1 9 Module Installation and Removal Rackmount Installation N WARNING Personal injury or damage to the instrument can occur if the instrument is not properly secured in the equipment rack The TG700 is configured at shipment for use in an equipment rack Use the information in the following figure to connect the rackmount hardware to the rack See Figure 1 1 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 5 Getting Started Stop latches Rear mounting Chassis section Flat bar nut Intermediate Seed section Stop latch hole Rear rack 10 32 pan head screws E ra Flat bar nut Use if front rail is not tapped 10 32 pan head screws Figure 1 1 Installing the rackmount hardware 1 6 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started The following figure
185. ccurs during this silence When Audio Click is OFF the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu is output continuously Audio Click makes it easy to identify any channel s of the four output channels TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu HDVG7 x TIMING Vertical 0 Line s lt gt Set the vertical timing HDVG7 x TIMING Horizontal 0 0000 msec lt gt Set the horizontal timing Figure 3 109 HDVG7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 2 to 1 2 frame in 1 line steps Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 to 1 line in 1 clock 13 5 ns steps NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 229 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator TIMECODE Submenu 3 230 Use this me
186. cond c aph s The Kxr T Ch H Freq parameter controls the change in horizontal sine frequency over time Setting Kxr to 1 0 for example causes the horizontal frequency to increase by one c aph each second If Kx is 0 0 then the frequency will be 10 c aph after ten seconds 20 c aph after twenty seconds and so forth The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format then the phase of the signal will flip by 180 the sine wave will become negative and the frequency will continue to increase through DC when the cycle will begin again Ky Parameter Display name KYT V Ch V Freq Units c aph per second c aph s The Kyr V Ch V Freq parameter controls the change in vertical sine frequency over time Setting Kyr to 1 0 for example causes the vertical frequency to increase by one c aph each second If KY is initially 0 0 then the frequency will be 10 c aph after ten seconds 20 c aph after twenty seconds and so forth The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format then the phase of the signal will flip by 180 the frequency will become negative and the frequency will continue to increase through DC in a repetitive cycle K Parameter Display name KT T Freq Units cycles per second c s The K T Freq parameter if used alone does not create a pattern Rather the entire screen will cycle sinusoidally between white a
187. conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only Installation Overvoltage Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category Category Descriptions designations The installation categories are m Measurement Category IV For measurements performed at the source of low voltage installation Measurement Category III For measurements performed in the building installation Measurement Category II For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation E Measurement Category I For measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to MAINS Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II as defined in IEC 61010 1 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual XV Compliance Information Environmental Considerations This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product Product End of Life Observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component Handling Equipment Recycling Production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product s end of life In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce
188. cquire satellites This means that the instrument is receiving data from the satellites and is determining which signals to use 3 Bad position This means that the instrument detects that the stored position is different from the current position In this case the instrument will automatically go to FOM state 4 and reacquire the position TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 105 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Time Flow Block Diagram 3 106 Table 3 17 Figures of merit for signal quality cont Figure of merit FOM Indicator Description 4 Acquire position This means that the instrument is acquiring multiple fixes of the satellite position and averaging this into a new position to store in flash This state will also be displayed if you manually perform a new position acquisition This state normally lasts 60 seconds with good GPS signal quality 5 Adjust phase This means that the instrument is adjusting the time base or frame timing to correctly line up with the GPS signal 6 Locked gt These states indicate that the phase of the Signal quality is lt 16 frame signals is within 150 ns of the GPS signal The number of arrows indicates the i oee a PE signal quality It is normal for this to vary with Signal quality is gt 16 the time of day as the different satellites move 8 Locked gt gt gt through their orbits as well as with changes in Signal quality is gt 26
189. ctive 2004 108 EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility when it is used with the product s stated in the specifications table Refer to the EMC specification published for the stated products May not meet the intent of the directive if used with other products European Contact Tektronix UK Ltd Western Peninsula Western Road Bracknell RG12 1RF United Kingdom 1 To ensure compliance with the EMC standards listed here high quality shielded interface cables should be used 2 Equal to or lt 40A peak in rush current for equal or less than 5 line cycles after the instrument has been turned off for at least 30 seconds Complies with the EMC provision of the Radiocommunications Act per the following standard in accordance with ACMA m EN 55022 1987 Radiated and conducted emissions Class B in accordance with EN 55103 1 1996 Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC EN 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL61010B 1 1st Edition Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use m CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 amp 1010 1B 97 1st Edition Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 JEC 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for me
190. day reference See page 3 126 TIME ZONE OFFSET menu Use this submenu to set the time zone offset for your location See page 3 128 DST SCHEDULE menu Use this submenu to configure how the module handles Daylight Saving Time See page 3 129 PROGRAM TIME menu Use this submenu to configure the program time parameters See page 3 130 m JAM SYNC menu Use this submenu to set parameters for the Jam Sync function See page 3 131 LEAP SECOND menu Use this submenu to configure how the module handles leap seconds See page 3 132 ALARM TIME menu Use this submenu to configure a time based alarm See page 3 133 m ALARM DELAY menu Use this submenu to configure a time to defer reporting errors so that brief errors are ignored See page 3 134 SELECT LTC Selects which LTC output to configure for timecode parameters Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the output you want to configure LTC 1 LTC 2 LTC 3 or LTC 4 and then press the ENTER button to access the LTC submenu for the selected output See page 3 135 SELECT GPIO Sets how the GPS7 General Purpose Interface GPT is configured Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the GPI input or output you want to configure INPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2 and then press the ENTER button to access the GPI submenu for the selected input or output When you select INPUT 1 you will access the GPI submenu See page 3 13
191. deo Generator 3 184 VIDEO Submenu Use this menu to turn each serial digital video component on or off individually generator mode only and to disable the edge filter and the AV Timing mode Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu NOTE The items in this menu modify the signal output to make it non standard To indicate that the signal is non standard an asterisk is inserted at the beginning of the signal name when a parameter has been changed in this menu Select VIDEO in the main menu A HD3G7 x VIDEO ON SPS A V HD3G7 x VIDEO ON De ON lt D ore HD3G7 x VIDEO Cr ON HD3G7 x VIDEO Edge Filter Enable d HD3G7 x VIDEO AV Timing Mode OFF VY 1970 256 1 Enable Disable ON lt D or Figure 3 90 HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu Y Turns the Y component YCbCr format G component GBR format or X component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Cb Turns the Cb component YCbCr format B component GBR format or Y component XYZ format of the serial digital video signal on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV
192. deo outputs for NTSC PAL or trilevel HD sync signals REF IN input shared with the BLACK 1 output connector to apply analog video signals to use as a generator lock Genlock reference Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the Genlock features NOTE The menus and menu discussions in this manual represent the newest features and software available including all Genlock features and the REF IN input Earlier instruments without the REF IN input have similar menu structures but not identical menu content Timecode output available as VITC on the black outputs and from four independent LTC outputs Timecode reference to time of day from the GPS receiver internal source VITC on the reference input or to a program time counter for elapsed time timecode Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP version 3 0 Server functionality to respond to time requests over the Ethernet interface 3 3 V or 5 V DC power output available for the GPS antenna One General Purpose Interface GPI input that allows you to remotely reset the program time reacquire the GPS position or to force a jam sync Two General Purpose Interface GPI outputs that allow you to send an alarm signal when the GPS signal quality falls below a user selectable level when there is a loss of lock on the GPS signal or incoming black signal with VITC or at a user selected time Ability to schedule GPS clock changes for Daylight Savings Time DST and for leap seconds Ability to co
193. digital video signal BLACK 1 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only BLACK 2 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Frame Reset Signals FRAME RESET 1 FRAME RESET 2 FRAME RESET 3 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics The TG700 uses the three frame reset signals described below to output different video formats simultaneously This frame reset signal supports the 1 1 001 system signal and is used by the following video formats These signals are synchronized with each other NTSC 1080 23 98sF 30 fps DF LTC 525 270 1080 29 97p 23 98 fps LTC 525 143 1080 59 94i 1035 59 94i 1080 59 94p 1 1080 23 98p 720 59 94p This frame reset signal supports the integer system signal and is used by the following video formats These signals are synchronized with each other PAL 1080 50i 24 fps LTC 625 270 1080 50p 25 fps LTC 1035 60i 1080 60i 30 fps LTC2 1080 25p 1080 60p 1 1080 30p 720 60p When frame reset signal 2 is selected the following video formats are available to frame reset signal 3 1080 24p 24 fps LTC 1080 24sF 25 fps LTC 30 fps LTC 2 1 HD3G7 and HDLG7 only 2 Not drop frame The frequency of frame reset signal 2 is always an integral multiple of the frame reset signal 3 frequency Frame reset signal 3 is synchronized with frame reset signal 2 Frame reset signal 1 is not
194. displayed Using AFD the aspect ratio of the picture can be automatically optimized for the display being used AFD is defined in SMPTE 2016 1 and mapping AFD and bar data is defined in SMPTE 2016 3 The packet format appears as shown here DID 0x41 SDID 0x05 DC 8 UDW 000 0 AFD Code AR 0 0 UDW 001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDW 00O2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDW 003 _T B L R 0 0 0 0 UDW 004 First bar data b8 b15 UDW 005 First bar data b0 b7 UDW 006 Second bar data b8 b15 UDW 007 Second bar data b0 b7 CS automatic calculation Where AR aspect ratio 1 16 9 0 4 3 T top bar data flag B bottom bar data flag L left bar data flag and R right bar data flag Note that these are all eight bit values for the respective User Data Word The HD3G7 module will automatically calculate the parity bits when Parity is set to Automatic which is the default TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 191 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 192 Most AFD codes do not require bar data information only the first user data word needs to be defined For example one common AFD code for a 16 9 coded frame is 1001 9 which indicates a 4 3 image horizontally centered with pillarboxes as shown in the following figure Figure 3 93 AFD code 1001 for a 16 9 coded frame Therefore for this AFD code set the data words as follows
195. djust the Genlock vertical offset in 1 line increments Horizontal Coarse Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the Genlock horizontal offset in 0 0185 psec increments Horizontal Fine Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the Genlock horizontal offset in 0 1 nsec increments NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 and right gt arrow buttons simultaneously LOSS LOCK ACTION Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the action that the module will make when a loss of lock condition is detected This can happen for example if the GPS antenna signal is lost Select one of the following actions and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Stay Current Frequency Sets the module timing to keep operating at the current frequency until the reference signal is recovered Go Internal Frequency Sets the module timing to switch to the internal frequency setting until the reference signal is recovered TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 117 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 118 GPS HOLDOVER RECOVERY Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select how the module timing responds when the reference signal is recovered after a loss of lock Select one of the following recovery modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE If the module timing is off by m
196. e Check for error messages as the instrument starts Connect a GPS signal to the rear of the module Allow the instrument to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes Press the MODULE button until GPS7 STATUS appears Check that the signal status shows Locked Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine a Press the up A arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS b Press the ENTER button c Press the right arrow button to select TUNE d Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display Press the MODULE button until TG700 appears Press the up A arrow button to select UTILITY Press the ENTER button Press the up A arrow button to select CAL OVEN SELECT Press the ENTER button to access the Internal Frequency Calibration submenu Press the ENTER button to start the calibration The instrument will display the stored calibration value Press the ENTER button Press the CANCEL button to exit the calibration menu when the calibration is complete TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 101 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 102 Gain calibration Perform the following procedure to characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage This adjustment needs to be performed in factory mode and is only needed once to characterize the oscillator CAUTION To avoid signal errors perform the Gain Calibration only when the instrument is out of service This calibratio
197. e 2 8 Figure 2 8 AVG7 module connectors NOTE Each pair of connectors CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 output the same signal CH1 Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal CH 2 Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal CH3 Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 7 Operating Basics AWVG7 Module Connectors BG7 Module Connectors 2 8 The AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is equipped with three pairs of BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 9 1970 048 Figure 2 9 AWVG7 module connectors NOTE Each pair of connectors CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 output the same signal CH 1 Outputs the selected analog component video signal CH 2 Outputs the selected analog component video signal CH 3 Outputs the selected analog component video signal The BG7 Black Generator module is equipped with four BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 10 BLACK 4 BLACK 2 Figure 2 10 BG7 module connectors BLACK 1 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal BLACK 3 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal Option CB enables this connector to also output a 10 field ID or color bars signal BLACK 4 Outputs
198. e address entered here Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address NOTE Ifyou enter blank characters for the IP address the network function of the TG700 becomes invalid SUBNET MASK Sets the subnet address of the TG700 When no value is set the default value is used If DHCP service is enabled the subnet address obtained from the DHCP server is used instead of the address entered here Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address BRDCAST ADDR Sets the broadcast address of the TG700 If DHCP service is enabled the broadcast address obtained from the DHCP server is used instead of the address entered here Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address GATEWAY ADDR Sets the gateway address of the TG700 Refer to Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address Manually setting a network address Use the following procedure to manually enter a network address 1 Press the ENTER button to enter the edit mode to input the address 2 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character _ and use the up A or down arrow button to enter the address value 3 After you enter the address value press the ENTER button to enable the address TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics D
199. e change offsets the incoming and outgoing time codes until the user reasserts the time synchronization TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 109 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 110 Leap Second Apply Leap seconds when required are added on June 30 and or December 31 at 23 59 60 UTC That is the minute preceding midnight has 61 seconds instead of 60 numbered 0 60 instead of 0 59 This might be an inconvenient time to make a local clock adjustment For example this is during prime time for the North American Eastern Time Zone Therefore the GPS7 gives the option of deferring the leap second adjustment if any on these dates for up to 24 hours DST Change Daylight Saving Time DST changes twice a year in many time zones but some locations do not observe daylight savings time The GPS7 has a user programmable DST adjustment to the time zone offset that is made by adding or subtracting a specified amount from the current value The scheduled date and time of the change must be programmed into the GPS7 For example to change to daylight savings time schedule the system to add one hour to the time zone offset at 02 00 00 local time on March 8 2009 To return to standard time schedule the system to subtract one hour from the time of day offset at 02 00 00 on November 1 2009 At the scheduled time and date the DST change is added to the time zone offset as seen from the instrument display You can t
200. e for format settings Front Panel Controls The following figure shows the locations of the front panel controls A brief discussion of each feature follows the illustration FRONT PANEL Menu control Test signal MODULE button butions buttons ENABLE button A DN 1 DA Tektronix TG7 O TV Signal Generator Platform S o Soo OO OC FORMAT a CANCEL MONITOR PULSEBAR TMNG EJ OTHER INTREF Y I ETREF LCD Display FORMAT button Reference indicator Figure 2 1 TG700 front panel LCD Display The LCD display is a two line 40 character per line display Almost all menus have two lines of text where the first line shows the current position in the current menu and the second line shows the current selection if there is not a submenu If nothing is on the second line press the ENTER button to access the corresponding submenu You can adjust the contrast of the LCD display using the UTILITY submenu See page 2 23 UTILITY Submenu MODULE Button Use the MODULE button to select the mainframe or installed module to control Repeatedly pressing this button scrolls through the main menu which shows the mainframe and the installed modules Select the one you want to control TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 1 Operating Basics FORMAT Button Menu Control Buttons Test Signal Buttons FRONT PANEL ENABLE 2 2
201. e front panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AVWVG7 x STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows AWVG7 x SELECT FORMAT 1080 59i Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock occurs 4 If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and displays the message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press CANCEL press the CANCEL button TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 51 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 52 Select the Test Signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the AWVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 26 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal se
202. e horizontal frequency reported on the display is the real time frequency of the sine wave that causes the vertical bar pattern The maximum frequency is half of the clock frequency used by the generator for the active video standard for example 74 25 MHz 2 37 125 MHz H Sweep H Sweep Frequency maximum MHz or multiple For horizontal sweep frequencies up to half of the video standard s sampling frequency fs the displayed value is the maximum or swept to frequency of the sine wave For numbers greater than f 2 dividing the displayed value by the sampling frequency will give the number of complete DC f 2 DC cycles per line For example in a standard with sampling frequency of 74 25 MHz a horizontal sweep frequency of 148 5 MHz will result in approximately two complete frequency sweeps across the picture V Sine Vertical Frequency c aph The vertical frequency is actually the Ky coefficient The maximum frequency c aph corresponds to the number of active video lines in a field of the active video standard For example when an 1125 line system is output which has 1080 active lines Ky can be any value between 540 and 540 V Sweep V Sweep Frequency maximum c aph or multiple TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual The vertical sweep frequency is actually the Ky 2 coefficient For numbers greater than maximum dividing the displayed value by that maximum will give twice the number of c
203. e main menu or SELECT OUTPUT submenu ATG x TIMING NTSC Vertical 0 Line s lt gt Set the vertical timing ATG7 x TIMING NTSC Horizontal 0 0000 msec lt J LS Set the horizontal timing Figure 3 14 ATG7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 2 color frame to 1 2 color frame in 1 line steps Horizontal Sets the horizontal timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to adjust the timing offset You can set the value from 1 line to 1 line in one clock steps 18 5 ns NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left lt 4 or right arrow buttons simultaneously The ATG7 horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments You can match the AGL7 or GPS7 module timing to the ATG7 module by adjusting the fine timing controls on the AGL7 or GPS7 module TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator APL Submenu Use this menu to set the APL and Bounce features for the test signal output from the SIGNAL connector Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the APL submenu Select APL in the main menu APL OFF ATG x APL MODE High APL APL OFF a APL Bounce Bounce bee Lie oda Set the bounce period Figu
204. e overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signals Scroll the active picture area of the output signal m Enable or disable the output and set parameters for each embedded audio group m Enable or disable the video output signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 79 DVG7 Digital Video Generator Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the DVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars ENTER DVG7 x MOVING PICTURE gt To MOVING PICTURE submenu CANCEL ENTER DVG7 x OVERLAY To OVERLAY submenu CANCEL Group 1 ENTER DVG7 x AUDIO EMBEDDED 1 gt Group 2 To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 1 Group 3 Group 4 CANCEL ENTER DVG7 x TIMING Te A To TIMING submenu CANCEL ENTER DVG7 x VIDEO To VIDEO submenu CANCEL ENTER DVG7 x BLACK OPTION To BLACK submenu CANCEL V Option BK only Figure 3 42 DVG7 module main menu 3 80 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 82 OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this
205. e shows the BLACK submenu Select BLACK OPTION in the main menu 1080 60i 1080 25p 720 50p 1080 59 94i 1080 24p 720 30p 1080 50i 10802398 720 29 97p lt 10 gt 108024se 1035 60i 720 25p 1080 2398sF 1035 59 94 720 24p 1080 30p 720 60p 720 23 98p 10802997p 72059 94p Black 50 Flat Field lt gt 40 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Group 1 ENTER lt gt Group 2 To AUDIO GROUP submenu Group 3 Group 4 CANCEL Figure 3 112 HDVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only 3 232 FORMAT Selects the format of the output serial digital black signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 60i 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 1035 60i TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 1035 59 94i 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 50p 720 30p 720 29 97p 720 25p 720 24p or 720 23 98p Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection SIGNAL Selects the serial digital black signal to output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Black serial digital black 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field and 100 Flat Field Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital black signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Select any of the groups and then press t
206. e value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Factory Default Settings 3 212 The following table shows the factory default settings for the HDLG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu NOTE The factory default settings put the HDLG7 module in the Generator mode Table 3 40 HDLG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59 94i GBR 4 4 4 12 bits SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y G Channel LINK OFFSET 0 0000 ms 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN HD Test Signal MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable Converter mode Normal Converter embedded audio LINK A 2K Horizontal Vertical Gradient offset Horizontal Gradient offset 16 Vertical Gradient offset 16 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module Product D
207. e way of constructing the 3 Gb s serial data stream as described in SMPTE 425 For the mapping structure 1 signals such as 1080p50 1080p59 94 and 1080p60 a Level A stream looks similar to HD video as defined in SMPTE 292 except the data rate is twice as fast In Level A the lines are sent in order consecutively For other mapping structures the video is at a lower frame rate but has more bits and or includes more channels Refer to the SMPTE 425 standard for details on the Level A mapping method Level B This is an alternate way of constructing the 3 Gb s serial data stream as described in SMPTE 425 A Level B stream looks similar to dual link as defined in SMPTE 372M The serial data is constructed by interleaving the two links of the dual link video signal As a result some formats will have the serial data take two lines worth of time to propagate This has implications for the effects of the pathological signals and can confuse the definition of timing adjustments Refer to the SMPTE 372M and SMPTE 425 standards for more information 2K x 1080 Available in both Level A and Level B mapping this selection provides 2048 x 1080 resolution signals primarily for digital cinema applications 2xHD Available in Level B mapping 2xHD signals provide two standard SMPTE 292 HD streams in the same format for example 10801 59 94 Select between Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black for the two streams HD Available when the HD
208. e you remove install or handle modules Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work surface covering capable of generating a static charge Do not remove the module circuit board assembly from the shield The shield is an important stiffener which prevents damage to surface mount components TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 9 Getting Started Installing a Module To install a module into an empty slot in the mainframe perform the following procedure 1 Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the rear panel of the mainframe 2 Use the following guidelines to select the slot where you will install the module The following figure shows a sample module configuration with the associated slot numbers For AGL7 and GPS7 modules only one of these modules can be installed in the TG700 mainframe at a time and it must be installed only in slot 1 All other modules may be installed in any slot location NOTE When installing a GPS7 module into an existing mainframe you must perform the TG700 mainframe oven calibration See page 2 29 CAL OVEN Submenu For AG7 ATG7 AVG7 BG7 DVG7 and HDLG7 modules up to four of the modules can be installed in the TG700 mainframe The HD3G7 AWVG7 and HDVG7 modules consume higher power than most of the TG700 modules Because of this there can only be a maximum of three of these modules installed at one time If an HDVG7 module that has a
209. econd to enable the front panel buttons The timeout counter is restarted if the timeout period is already set and the indicator next to the button lights to show that the front panel is enabled Refer to UTILITY Submenu for more information about the settings the period until the front panel times out See page 2 23 The reference indicators indicate whether the TG700 is locked externally or internally INT REF This indicator lights when the TG700 is using its internal reference oscillator EXT REF This indicator lights when the TG700 is locked to an external reference signal or when a GPS7 module is locked to a satellite signal If this indicator is blinking the TG700 is configured to use the external reference signal but is unable to lock to the signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics Rear Panel Connectors 10 BASE T port The following figure shows the locations of the TG700 mainframe and module connectors on the rear panel A brief discussion of each connector follows the illustration CAUTION If power is applied to the mainframe be sure to terminate any unused outputs on any of the modules using 75 Q terminators Module slots Power cord connector Figure 2 2 TG700 rear panel Power Connector 10 BASE T Port AG7 Module Connectors The TG700 is designed to operate from a single phase power source with the neutral conduct
210. ect Antenna Power e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 3 3 V f Press the ENTER button Check that the voltmeter shows between 3 3 V and 4 V Use the left lt 4 arrow to set the antenna voltage to 5 V Press the ENTER button fF TFS Check that the voltmeter shows between 5 V and 6 V TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 25 Getting Started 1 26 Antenna current and fault thresholds 10 11 Connect the BNC to Banana plug adapter to the voltmeter Connect the BNC T to the adapter Set the antenna power to 5 V a Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module b Use the up A or down arrow button to select GPS SETUP c Press the ENTER button d Use the up A or down arrow button to select Antenna Power e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 5 V f Press the ENTER button Connect a 75 Q BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the module Check that the LED located between the DSUB connector and the antenna input on the rear panel of the module is flashing green Green indicates an open circuit Apply a 75 Q terminator to the BNC T and check that the voltage is between 4 5 V and 5 V Check that the LED on the module back panel is a steady green This indicates a nominal load Connect the second BNC T and 75 Q terminator to the antenna
211. ecting or disconnecting the input or when no input is present When this occurs clear the errors after the connections are made by using the Diagnostics gt Clear CRC Errors submenu After clearing the errors monitor this readout if you have concerns about the input signal This diagnostic displays the following m Y The number of errors detected on the Y portion of the active picture area of the input signal m YANC The number of errors detected on the Y portion of the ancillary data space in the input signal C The number of errors detected on the C portion of the active picture area of the input signal m CANC The number of errors detected on the C portion of the ancillary data space in the input signal CLEAR CRC ERRORS Press the ENTER button to clear the CRC error counters TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 195 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator CALIBRATION Submenu 3 196 TEMPERATURES This diagnostic displays the temperature of the HD3G7 module board and FPGA FPGA VERSION This diagnostic displays the current and expected FPGA versions If there is a discrepancy between the two a warning appears which means that the FPGA firmware might need to be upgraded VOLTAGE MON 1 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 2 This diagnostic measures in
212. ector to the lower LINK B connector 16 Repeat steps 10 through 13 for the lower LINK A and LINK B connectors Converter function 17 Set the HDTV digital video generator as indicated below Output signal 100 Color Bars Format 1080 59 941 18 Connect the output connector on the HDTV digital video generator to the HD SDI IN connector on the HDLG7 using the 75 Q BNC cable 19 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 59 94p and then press the ENTER button 20 Press the OTHER button to select the converter mode 21 Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT A signal 22 Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed 23 Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT B signal 24 Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed 25 Change the BNC cable from the lower LINK A connector to the upper LINK A connector 26 Change the BNC cable from the lower LINK B connector to the upper LINK B connector 27 Repeat steps 21 through 24 for the upper LINK A and LINK B connectors HDVG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Check Generator module is functional Required equipment HDTV waveform monitor E 75 Q BNC cable Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform by connecting it to the power source The initializati
213. ed on unlock a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the up A or down V arrow button to select SELECT GPIO c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Output 1 e Press the ENTER button f Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Loss of lock g Press the ENTER button Check that the voltage on the GPI output measures between 4 5 V and 5 5 V Disconnect the antenna input After 15 seconds check that the GPI 1 output is below 0 5 V Repeat this procedure for the GPI 2 output GPI input 1 Configure the GPS7 GPI input to reset the program time a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the up A or down V arrow button to select SELECT GPIO c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Input 1 e Press the ENTER button f Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Reset Program Time g Press the ENTER button h Press the CANCEL button to exit the Select GPIO menu Press the up arrow to select the STATUS display If needed use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to display Program Time Write down the program time Connect the LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC GPI DSUB on the back of the GPS7 module Attach a 75 Q terminator to the GPI input for 2 seconds and then remove it Look at the program time now and compare it to the p
214. ed to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG700 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu A HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO X Position 0 0 APH a gt Select OFF or a logo lt gt Set the horizontal position HDVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Y Position 0 0 APH HDVG x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters Figure 3 104 HDVG7 module LOGO submenu _ gt Set the vertical position Save the display position for the logo Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled X Position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press t
215. ee eee eee eeeeeeenees 3 226 Figure 3 108 HDVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu c eceec eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 227 Figure 3 109 HDVG7 module TIMING submenu ceceec eee eeeeceeeeeneeneeee eae eneeaees 3 229 Figure 3 110 HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu 0 eccecceceeceene ene eee eee eeenees 3 230 Figure 3 111 HDVG7 module VIDEO submenu 00 ccc eee cece cee eee cee neene eee taeeneeaees 3 231 Figure 3 112 HDVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only ccceceeeeeeeeeee nes 3 232 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual vii Table of Contents List of Tables viii Table 1 1 Standard and optional accessories ce ccc ecc cence eee eee e eee eee ene e ene ene e ena ennee ens 1 3 Table 1 2 Instrument and module options 2 ccc cee ce ence eect eee ene ence eeeee eee eneeneeeeeeaenees 1 3 Table 1 3 TG700 environmental requirements 0 c cece cece cent eee ene e nee e een nee enaeenee ens 1 7 Table 1 4 AC line power requirements ccc cece ec ee eee n eee eee nee nen nent ene tne e eee ene e ens 1 8 Table 2 1 GPS7 module LTC GPI connector pin assignments cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee es 2 11 Table 2 2 Mainframe GPI jumper settings on the A10 MAIN boartd cceceeeeeeeeee eee ens 2 35 Table 2 3 Pin assignments of the 10 BASE T connector for the mainframe GPI 2 36 Table 2 4 Signal lev
216. el combinations and the corresponding preset for the mainframe GPI 2 36 Table 2 5 External inspection check list 0 2 0 0 ccc cece cece cence eee nee enn e nee ene ene e eee ene eed 2 43 Table 3 1 AG7 module factory default settings 0 cece cece cence eee cent e nee eeeeeneeenaennee ens 3 6 Table 3 2 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 input signals 00 ccc ccc eee ce eee ee eee eenee es 3 15 Table 3 3 Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals cecceee cence eee e eee enee es 3 15 Table 3 4 AGL7 module factory default settings 0 0 cece ccc cece eee eens eee ee tenet ena eenee es 3 16 Table 3 5 ATG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cecceece cece sees ee eenee es 3 20 Table 3 6 Test signals in the ATG7 SELECT SIGNAL submenu 0 0 ce cceeeeeeeee eee eee ees 3 23 Table 3 7 ATG7 module factory default settingS 0 cece cece cece eee cent eee eee e nee enee ene e es 3 28 Table 3 8 AVG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ce sce ece cece ence eee enee es 3 32 Table 3 9 AVG7 module factory default settings 00 cco ccc ecc cece eee cence eee eee ene e sean enee es 3 48 Table 3 10 AWVG7 signal set assigned to the test signal buttons cc cccceceeeeeeeee ener es 3 52 Table 3 11 Timing adjustment ranges for AWVG7 module output signals cece eee ee ees 3 61 Table
217. elect an output signal press the up A or down arrow button while the SELECT FORMAT submenu is displayed to enter one of the following submenus m TIMING Use the TIMING submenu to set the timing offset for the selected black signal output See page 3 69 TIMECODE Use the TIMECODE submenu to set timecode parameters for the selected output when a GPS7 module is installed The BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed This submenu is not available when HD SYNC is the selected signal format See page 3 70 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 67 BG7 Black Generator SELECT SIGNAL Submenu Use this menu to select a signal for the selected BLACK output The following figure shows the SELECT SIGNAL submenu NTSC and PAL HD SYNC BG x BLACK 1 NTSC A NTSC No Setup Black Burst 080 60i Black Burst SS gt Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF 080 59 94i Black Burst with Field REF 100 Color Bars 080 50i Black Burst with 10 Field ID 75 Color Bars 080 24sF 100 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 080 23 98sF 75 Color Bars 75 Color Bars Over Red 080 30p SMPTE Color Bars 40 Flat Field 080 29 97p 40 Flat Field Other 1 080 25p Other 1 Other 2 080 24p Other 2 Option CB only 1080 23 98p Option CB only 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 50p These signals are available with Option CB only Figure 3 37 BG7 module SELECT SIGNAL
218. elected format and displays the following message Now Loading When you see the message Done Press CANCEL press the CANCEL button TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 31 AVG7 Analog Video Generator Select the Test Signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the AVG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output See Figure 3 16 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons Figure 3 16 Front panel test signal buttons If your TG700 mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed you can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the AVG7 module See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the AVG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set The list of
219. elow AGL7 1 GENLOCK STATUS Internal 5 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus See page 3 9 AGL7 Module Main Menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock Module AGL7 Module Main Menu Use the AGL7 module main menu to select the genlock source and the output whose parameters are to be changed Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AGL7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button AGL7 1 GENLOCK STATUS 1080 59 94 Internal AGL 1 GENLOCK AGL 1 SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 Figure 3 4 AGL7 module main menu ENTER To GENLOCK submenu CANCEL ENTER BLACK 1 ra BLACK 2 To OUTPUT submenu BLACK 3 CANCEL STATUS Displays the genlock source and status The following status messages may appear Locked Loss of Lock and No signal GENLOCK Selects the genlock source and sets the timing offset of the genlock signal relative to the internal reference signal When you select this menu item and press the ENTER button you will access the GENLOCK submenu See page 3 10 SELECT OUTPUT Selects the output for you to change the signal format output signal and timing offset relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 When you select
220. ence cent eee eae eeeeeeeeneees 3 87 DVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu 0 0 0 ccc ccc cc cence cee ee cence eeeeeeees 3 88 DVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu c ccc ce ece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 89 DVG7 module TIMING submenu 00 ccc ccc cece cence ence eee e eee eee eneeees 3 91 DVG7 module VIDEO submenu ccc cece cence cence eee n nee e ents eens eee eenees 3 92 DVG7 module BLACK submenu Option BK only cece eec cence eee e enone 3 94 Simplified antenna System esei a did dadee yes entadeda Gan nagedarypenesateer ts 3 103 Time flow block diagram 0 c cece cece cee enn EEE EEE EEE 3 107 GP S7 modul MAM MENU seridou oes does ve betes de RWa a Wasa oe AAE ENEY 3 113 GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu 000 cece cece een eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 116 GPS7 module BLACK submenu 0cccc cece eee cence eect eens teense ena 3 119 GPS7 module TIMING submenu 00 c ccc cece ccc ence cent eens ee eeeeeenes 3 120 GPS7 module TIMECODE submenu 0 0 ccc cece cece cence eens eeeeeenees 3 122 GPS7 module VITC submenu ccc cece cece eee e ence eee eens teen nena 3 123 GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu 0 ccc ccc ccc ence cent eens eenneeeennees 3 124 GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu cc ccc cece cee n nee ee nae ee eee e enna 3 126 GPS7 module TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu 0
221. ent linear timecode outputs Each output can be set independently with regard to timecode format module timing and timecode delay TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Analog Black The GPS7 module has three analog sync outputs Each output can be configured as NTSC or PAL black burst with optional VITC insertion or HD trilevel sync The BG7 module has four analog sync outputs which can be similarly configured HD SDI The standard HDVG7 module has one HD SDI test signal generator with two outputs for which ancillary timecode ATC can be added If Option BK is available then there are two independent HD SDI test signal generators available Program Time As an alternate to the local time of day a program time counter can be used as a timecode source for any output This counter can represent elapsed time such as the timecode associated with program content during the editing process for example Reset Value The program time counter will start counting from the specified reset value Program time can be reset to this value at any time using either the user interface or a general purpose interface GPI input Alarm Time An alarm can be set to generate when the program time counter matches a predefined value For example you can specify the start timecode of your program content at 01 00 00 00 The program time can be initialized to 00 59 00 00 to start a one minute lead
222. enu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 92 Factory Default Settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the DVG7 Generator module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 16 DVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS 525 270 SMPTE Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 APH AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 20 bits TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 95 DVG7 Digital Video Generator 3 96 Table 3 16 DVG7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings AUDIO GRP 1 Ch 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us VIDEO Y ON Pb ON Pr ON Resolution 10 bits EDH ON AV Timing Mode OFF Option BK BLACK FORMAT 525 270 BLACK SIGNAL Black BLACK AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Statu
223. epeatedly to display the mainframe main menu 2 Use the up A or down arrow button to select UTILITY and then press the ENTER button This accesses the UTILITY submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 31 Operating Basics A 3 Use the up A or down arrow button to select Network 4 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Setup This accesses the NETWORK SETUP submenu See Figure 2 23 on page 2 27 Setting the parameters on a network with a DHCP server If your network has a DHCP server use the NETWORK SETUP submenu to enable the TG700 to function as a DHCP client When the TG700 is connected to the network and DHCP service is enabled the TG700 obtains the necessary network addresses automatically from the DHCP server NOTE Under some network environments the TG700 may not be able to get the IP address automatically from a DHCP server In this case you need to enter the appropriate address value in each submenu item Refer to your network administrator or to the user documentation supplied with your network server operating system OS for detailed information about DHCP server functions Setting the parameters on a network without a DHCP server If your network does not have a DHCP server perform the following procedure to set the network parameters 1 Ifyou connect the TG700 directly to a single PC a Set the IP ADDRESS parameter to be the same IP address as
224. er before the program The alarm time could be set at 00 59 55 00 to signal a five second countdown before the program start perhaps to signal a change from color bars to black within the pre program leader GPI Out The GPS7 module has two General Purpose Interface GPT outputs either of which may be configured to begin when the program time matches a specified alarm time Configuring Module Understanding the capabilities operating environment antenna system and other Settings requirements of the GPS7 module can help you decide how to configure it to best meet the needs of your specific applications The GPS7 menu trees and menu descriptions can help you configure the module See page 3 112 GPS7 Module Main Menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 111 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GPS7 Module Main Menu Use the GPS7 module main menu to perform the following tasks View the status of the module and signal View diagnostics results for the module m Select the LTC output or GPI input and output Set the antenna voltage time of day and other time related parameters m Generate a Black 1 Black 2 or Black 3 signal Set the timing reference source Internal Genlock or GPS signal Set the Genlock Timing Set the Time Of Day source Internal VITC input or GPS signal NOTE Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the REF IN input connector shared with the BLACK 1 output connector Modules
225. er to Accessories See page 1 3 6 Ifyou want to install another module into the slot from which the module is removed perform nstalling a Module starting at step 4 See page 1 9 Module Installation and Removal Functional Checks Use the following procedures to check that the TG700 modules installed in your instrument are functional AG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the AG7 Audio Generator module Check is functional Required equipment Digital audio monitor Oscilloscope TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 13 Getting Started AGL7 Module Functional Check m 75 Q BNC cable m 75 Q Termination Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the AG7 main menu as shown below appears AG7 x CHANNEL PARAMETERS Channel 1 6 10 11 12 13 14 Connect the 1 2 connector to the digital audio monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the digital audio monitor to display the status for the audio data Check that any CRC error does not appear on the monitor Change the BNC cable from the 1 2 connector to the 3 4 connector and check that no CRC
226. escription HDVG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 14 HDVG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 37 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module The HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module is an HDTV test signal generator that provides 1 485 Gb s serial digital video signals in various formats The module provides the following features Two serial digital video outputs Two serial digital black outputs Option BK Supports SMPTE 274M 1080 SMPTE 240M 1035 and SMPTE 296M 720 Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal m Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Generates timecode with ATC when a GPS7 module is installed Up to 16 channels of Embedded Audio Full remote control using Ethernet interface TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 213 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator Operating Procedure 3 214 m Generates video signals with 24 or 20 bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of 48 kHz The module suppor
227. ets the timecode parameters for the module outputs when a GPS7 module is installed To support this capability the module hardware must be version 2 0 or above The TG700 mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 230 VIDEO Enables or disables the Y Pb or Pr component of the output serial digital video signals and the output mode for audio video timing measurement Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 231 BLACK OPTION This menu is only available with Option BK and sets the parameters of the serial digital black signals output from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu See page 3 232 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 219 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Submenu 3 220 Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal up down or left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu Set the sample number to be scrolled Set the line number to be scrolled Set the frame period to be scrolled Random Disable Enable Figure 3 102 HDVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu
228. ex1 reading and the DDS Status DDS1 Phase reading show Lock Press the right arrow button to display the CRC Errors submenu and monitor the CRC error counts for five seconds Press the right gt arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that the voltage readings show OK Set the waveform monitor to view the signal Check that the signal appears as expected Check for errors on the video session screen of the waveform monitor Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1080 59 94p then press ENTER Check that the signal appears as expected on the waveform monitor and check for errors on the video session screen TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Converter function 21 Set the HDTV video generator as indicated below Output signal Ramp Format 1080 59 941 22 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 main menu shown below appears HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94 YCbCr 422 10b 23 Connect the output connector on the HDTV video generator to the HD SDI IN connector on the HD3G7 using the 75 Q BNC cable 24 Connect the SIGNAL 1 output connector on the HD3G7 to an SDI input connector on the waveform monitor using a 75 Q BNC cable 25 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 o
229. expiration of the warranty period If Tektronix is unable to provide a replacement that is free from defects in materials and workmanship within a reasonable time thereafter Customer may terminate the license for the Program and return the Program and any associated materials for credit or refund THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PROGRAM IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPLACE DEFECTIVE MEDIA OR REFUND CUSTOMER S PAYMENT IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL TEKTRONIX OR OTHERS FROM WHOM TEKTRONIX HAS OBTAINED A LICENSING RIGHT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR CONNECTED WITH CUSTOMER S POSSESSION OR USE OF THE PROGRAM EVEN IF TEKTRONIX OR SUCH OTHERS HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIRD PARTY DISCLAIMER Except as expressly agreed otherwise third parties from whom Tektronix may have obtained a licensing right do not warrant the program do not assume any liability with respect to its use and do not undertake to furnish any support or information relating thereto GENERAL This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use reproduction and trans
230. f 30psf Output sample structure YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Select the Output Mode You can select how the generated 1 5 Gb s or 3 Gb s serial data stream is TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual constructed This selection is available in the HD3G7 OUTPUT MODE submenu Perform the following steps to select the output mode 1 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 module main menu appears as shown below HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 1 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 257 2 Press the down arrow button to access the output mode menu as shown below HD3G7 x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 d 1970 241 Note the dot at the start of the second line and the return symbol at the end of the second line The dot indicates that this is the currently selected output mode and the return symbol indicates that you can press the ENTER button to select a new displayed output mode 3 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the available output modes 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 3G Level A 1280 x 720 3G Level A 2K x 1080 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 3G Level B 2K x 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 720 HD 1920 x 1080 HD 1280 x 720 4 Press the ENTER button to select the desired output mode Note that the dot will appear in front of the output mode on the display to indicate that it is now the selected outpu
231. fer of the Program Neither this Agreement nor the license granted herein is assignable or transferable by Customer without the prior written consent of Tektronix This Agreement and the license granted herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of Oregon All questions regarding this Agreement or the license granted herein should be directed to the nearest Tektronix Sales Office Table of Contents General Safety Summary erriren eei era web s edad edd Sesion denies sibaidea E EREE E EEE AS ESEE x Service Safety SUMMATY onere eein nnii ta Era ER EERE EE E EUNE EAE EON EEE ARE EAEE EE EEE xii Compliance Informatio sernsseesine eies e ei a Ea E a N ERE E aS E xiii EMG Compliance enrere EE EE EEEn ETE E EEE EE EES E SEAR xiii Safety Complhantessern ens eenn i s enis EE a AEE E E EEEREN xiv Environmental Considerations 0 ccce ccc n eee eresse rsrsrsrsrs srsessesrsersrssessrsn gt xvi Preface erae a EE EEE EAE EEE EIEE A SERAS xvii Prod tiSis eeren EEEE REEE EE EREA ENE E ETES OEE EAN xvii About This Manta ic cs5c0sgeeieshdasidue psinecdnee s ENE E E TEREN E EEr EEO xvii Related Manuals sirenen nan e a E E A E E A E ied nn aai xviii Getting Started Getting Started sc iccdchadcsatediens en E IN EE NEENA E NNT EINA EENAA 1 1 Product DesGriptioniss 2cicdcdatassuaunbioidsiad oat bavedan ated haawludilhidcaaaan th naiadded EEAS 1 1 Mainframe Memory Requirements 0 ccc cece cece eee eee eee ene ene ene ene n een t
232. file is saved 3 Press the ENTER button to assign the frame picture file to the OTHER button Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about creating a frame picture file and downloading the file from a PC to the TG700 Use this menu to display all of the current network parameters Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a network parameter and display the assigned address The following selections are available IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address Gateway Address MAC Address and DHCP Server The following figure shows NETWORK INFORMATION submenu Select Information in the UTILITY NETWORK menu IP Address Subnet Mask TG700 UTILITY NETWORK INFO Broadcast Address IP Address 172 17 37 59 Gateway Address MAC Address DHCP Address Figure 2 22 NETWORK INFORMATION submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics NETWORK SETUP Use this menu to set the network parameters for the 10 BASE T port on the Submenu TG700 which will be used when you remotely control the TG700 using a PC and when you transfer files between the TG700 and a PC Refer to Connecting to a Network for detailed information about connecting the TG700 to a PC See page 2 31 Use the up lt 4 or right arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the NETWORK SETUP submenu Select Setup in the UTILITY NETWORK menu A TG
233. firm the selection This menu item appears only when a composite signal is being output GBR SYNC Sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the B signal and R signal when a GBR signal is being output Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Syne ON Green and Sync ON All Channels When you select Sync ON All Channels a sync signal is multiplexed with the G B and R signals Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu item appears only when a GBR signal is being output G Y Turns the CH 1 signal output on or off for a component signal or turns the Y signal on or off for a composite signal Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component GBR component or composite and the output channel configuration B Pb B Y Turns the CH 2 signal output on or off for a component signal or turns the B Y signal on or off for a composite signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component GBR component or composite and the output channel configuration R Pr R Y Turns the CH 3 signal output on or off for a component signal or turns the R
234. ght arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up 4 and down F arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the User Data Word and exit User Data Word editing for that word NOTE To make this process easier you can use the PC based TGSetup application This application also allows you to import and export User Data Words as CSV files TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 189 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 190 CLEAR UDW Use this menu selection to clear the entire User Data Word Press the ENTER button to enter the CLEAR UDW mode which will present the following dialog Clear entire UDW Yes ENTER No CANCEL Press the ENTER button to clear the User Data Word and exit CLEAR UDW or press the CANCEL button to exit without clearing the User Data Word CS Use this menu selection to set the Checksum Press the ENTER button to edit the Checksum You can set the Checksum from 0x00 to OxFF in 8 bit mode or from 0x000 to 0x3FF in 10 bit mode Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the number for that position Press the ENTER button to confirm the Checksum and exit Checksum editing Auto Calculate CS Use this menu selection to enable or disable checksum auto calculation Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select between
235. gnal Generator Platform User Manual 3 227 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 3 228 Frequency Sets the audio signal frequency of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the frequency The selection items are as follows Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz When Inactive is selected the audio data output is disabled Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Amplitude Sets the audio signal amplitude of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the amplitude You can set the value from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps Audio Click Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel The audio tone if any is turned off for an interval around the audio click Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are OFF 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec and 4 sec Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click rate When Audio Click is valid Audio Tone is turned off for 0 25 second around the click For example if you select 3 see for the click rate the audio tone will be output for 2 75 seconds and silent for 0 25 second the click o
236. gnal is converted to XYZ by normalizing the gamma corrected RGB signal and applying the results to a RGB to XYZ color space converter The output of the converter is gamma corrected for digital cinema The XYZ mode can be selected only in the 2K format mode TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator Perform the following steps to select the converter mode 1 Press the front panel OTHER button The menu display changes as follows HDLG7 x CONVERTER Normal GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 2 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the OTHER button repeatedly to select between Normal and Y to GBR Normal The incoming YCbCr signal is converted to a normal dual link output Y to GBR The incoming Y data is applied to the G B and R outputs This allows higher bandwidth data such as multiburst or sweep to be placed on all three channels If the sampling structure is for a YCbCr or XYZ output the Y to GBR selection is not available 3 Press the up A or down arrow button to select Embedded Audio selection menu Then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the following Link A Only Places the incoming embedded audio on the converter mode Dual Link A output Conforms to the SMPTE 372M standard In the case of converting 1920x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz to 2048x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz with 16 channels four groups of embedded audio 8 channels two groups wil
237. he ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 226 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the serial digital black outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 229 Factory Default Settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the HDVG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 42 HDVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS 1080 59 941 SMPTE Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 APH TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 233 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator Table 3 42 HDVG7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 24 bits AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF TIMING Ve
238. he ENTER button to save the current settings TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator ID TEXT Submenu Use this menu to edit a text overlaid on the output test signal and to set the display position of the text Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the OVERLAY submenu Disable gt Enable HDVG x OVERLAY TEXT X Position 0 0 APH gt Set the horizontal position HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT EDIT HDVG7 x OVERLAY TEXT SAVE Figure 3 105 HDVG7 module ID TEXT submenu Set the vertical position A lt gt Edit text V Save the text to the signal file Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X Position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y Position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the
239. he front panel MODULE button until the AVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AVG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars pn gt Select the signal format and the signal you want to output See page 3 31 Selecting an Output Signal Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to AVG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 36 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator Selecting an Output Signal To output a signal from the AVG7 module you need to select a signal format and output signal as described below Select the Signal Format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Ifthe AVG7 module menu is not displayed press the front panel MODULE button until the AVG7 module main menu appears as shown below AVG x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows AVG x SELECT FORMAT NTSC Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change signal format synchronization shock occurs gt If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output the instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the s
240. he left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 57 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 58 EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 U ENTER button to enable the text edit mode U _ to the character you want to change U se the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select EDIT and then press the se the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to move the underscore character se the up A or down arrow button to select the desired character After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator CIRCLE Submenu Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set its position on the display Use the up 4 or down F arrow button to
241. he main menu Press the up A or down arrow button to select VIDEO from the main menu and then press the ENTER button The VIDEO submenu shown below appears AVG x VIDEO CONFIGURATION CH1 2 3 Composites 10 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select CH1 2 3 Composites and then press the ENTER button 11 Connect the upper or lower CH 1 connector to the waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable 12 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 19 Getting Started 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the CH 2 connector Check that the signal appears as expected Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 2 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the CH 3 connector Check that the signal appears as expected Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 3 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the CH 1 connector Press the test signal button again to output the another test signal in the same signal set Check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes You need not perform this check for the CH 2 and CH 3 connectors Repeat steps 11 through 20 for the lower or upper output channels
242. he preset you want to delete and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection You cannot delete the following presets Power on Default User Default and Factory Default TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics SEQUENCE Submenus Use this menu to select and run a sequence that is already loaded into the TG700 See Figure 2 18 A sequence is a series of generator settings defined using the Tcl language and SCPI commands The TG700 loads a sequence and runs the command and settings in the order dictated by the sequences file Select SEQUENCE in the main menu TG 00 SEQUENCE PLAYBACK No Sequence Loaded A V TG700 SEQUENCE STOP V Figure 2 18 SEQUENCE submenu lt gt Select a sequence to be run Stop the currently running sequence PLAYBACK Selects and runs a sequence Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the sequence you want to run and then press the ENTER button to run the sequence If no sequence is loaded into the instrument the message No Sequence Found is displayed on the second line STOP Stops the currently running sequence When you select the menu item and then press the ENTER button the sequence is stopped Refer to the TG700 Programmer Manual for detailed information about using sequences TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 21 Operating Basics FRAME RESET STATUS Submenu 2 22 Use th
243. he timing reference NTSC Burst Uses the NTSC black burst signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference NTSC Burst with 10 FieldID Uses the NTSC black burst with 10 Field ID signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference PAL Burst Uses the PAL black burst signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference HD SYNC Uses the HDTV trilevel signal applied to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector as the timing reference NOTE The Time Of Day can also be set to Internal VITC or GPS See page 3 126 TIME OF DAY submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GENLOCK TIMING Adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the internal reference signal Press the ENTER button to access the GENLOCK TIMING submenu shown below NOTE GENLOCK TIMING is only available when the REFERENCE SOURCE is set to NTSC NTSC with 10 FieldID PAL or HDTV Select the GENLOCK TIMING menu in the REFERENCE menu GPS7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC BURST A Vertical x Line s Vertical 0 Line s lt q Horizontal Coarse x xxxx US J Horizontal Fine x xx nsec 1970 247 Use the up A or down arrow button to select a timing parameter and then use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the parameter Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to a
244. hen program the next scheduled DST change VITC may have DST shift already applied To avoid duplicating DST shifts disable the DST SCHEDULER if the time of day reference has DST applied Task Scheduler The task scheduler is responsible for triggering scheduled events at the appropriate time This includes DST changes deferred leap second adjustments and triggered alarm outputs SNTP Server The GPS7 includes an implementation of the Simple Network Time Protocol version 3 0 using the network interface of the TG700 mainframe The SNTP server is automatic when the Master time is set to GPS and the GPS7 acquires a valid time the server will respond with valid SNTP packets to time requests from NTP clients When the Master time is set to GPS the server always responds with UTC time only It is the responsibility of the NTP client PC workstation file server etc to be configured with the correct time zone offset The SNTP Server will also respond with valid SNTP packets when the Master time is set to Internal mode When using VITC input as the time reference the SNTP service is not available TC Offset Every timecode output has an independent offset hours minutes seconds frames that can be added to the value of the selected timecode source TC Engine The timecode engine runs at the rate specified through the user interface and generates the actual timecode bits needed for each output LTC The GPS7 module has four independ
245. ields 0 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst 100 Sweep Convergence Pattern Grey Window 2 Level Ped amp Pluge White Window 4 Level Ped amp Pluge Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Bowtie SWEEP Sweep MONITOR Monitor PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar TIMING Timing SDI i OTHER B TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 35 AVG7 Analog Video Generator AVG7 Module Main Menu Use the AVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signal m Set the APL settings on the output signal Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button AVG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars V Figure 3 17 AVG7 module main menu 3 36 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 38 OVERLAY Selects an item logo text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this
246. ific to the module The Service manual is optional and must be ordered separately The 7G700 TV Signal Generator Platform Release Notes Tektronix part number 077 0229 XX describes the new features improvements and limitations of the most recent available firmware for the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform This information is provided in both Japanese and English TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Getting Started This section contains the following information Product Description Product description Mainframe memory requirements List of instrument accessories and options Initial product inspection procedure Installation instructions mainframe and modules Functional check procedures The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform is a multiformat TV signal generator platform supporting both analog and digital video standards The TG700 consists of a mainframe and up to four plug in modules The modules are either signal generators or they provide special functions such as genlock capability Key Features The TG700 and the available modules provide the following features Simultaneous generation of HDTV SDTV multiformat synchronized signal and test signal Modular architecture with up to four generators or special function modules Analog genlock function dealing with NTSC or PAL black burst signal HDTV trilevel sync signal and CW signals AGL7 Synchronization with the GPS timing signal GP
247. ift already applied To avoid duplicating DST shifts disable the DST SCHEDULER if the time of day reference has DST applied Use this menu to set the initial value for the Program Time counter The following figure shows the PROGRAM TIME submenu Select PROGRAM TIME menu in the main menu A GPS x TIME SETUP PROG TIME APPLY Press ENTER to apply initial time Applies initial time GPS7 x TIME SETUP PROG TIME SETUP A Initial Time 00 00 i Edit time 1970 217 Figure 3 65 GPS7 module PROGRAM TIME submenu APPLY Press the ENTER button to immediately apply the initial program time entered in the SETUP parameter below SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the Program Time counter to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module JAM SYNC Submenu Use this menu to set parameters for the Jam Sync function Use the function to immediately synchronize the module timecode with the selected time source for each output or to regularly schedule a synchronization Use the up
248. ignal format in 1 clock 18 5 ns steps Horizontal fine Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset You can set the value from 10 ns to 10 ns in 0 1 ns steps Table 3 11 Timing adjustment ranges for AWVG7 module output signals Signal format Line settings Coarse settings us Fine settings ns 1080 60i YPbPr GBR 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 59i YPbPr GBR 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 50i YPbPr GBR 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24sF YPbPr GBR 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23sF YPbPr GBR 562 37 0741 10 00 1080 30p YPbPr GBR 562 29 6296 10 00 1080 29p YPbPr GBR 562 29 6593 10 00 1080 25p YPbPr GBR 562 35 5556 10 00 1080 24p YPbPr GBR 562 37 0370 10 00 1080 23p YPbPr GBR 562 37 0741 10 00 720 60p YPbPr GBR 375 22 2222 10 00 720 59p YPbPr GBR 375 22 4444 10 00 720 50p YPbPr GBR 375 26 6667 10 00 720 30p YPbPr GBR 375 53 3333 10 00 720 29p YPbPr GBR 375 45 9770 10 00 720 25p YPbPr GBR 375 44 4444 10 00 720 24p YPbPr GBR 375 55 5556 10 00 720 23p YPbPr GBR 375 55 6111 10 00 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 61 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 62 VIDEO Submenu Use this menu to perform the following tasks Enable or disable the signal output from the CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and
249. ignal levels for the pins and the preset number to be recalled Table 2 4 Signal level combinations and the corresponding preset for the mainframe GPI Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Preset number High High Low 1 HIgh Low High 2 High Low Low 3 Low High High 4 Low High Low 5 Low Low High 6 Low Low Low 7 All of the input signals are active low When the signal level s for the specified pin s goes from High to Low the corresponding preset is recalled For example when the signal level for pin 3 goes from High to Low preset 1 is recalled NOTE Since the signal transition cannot be detected on the edge of the signal the signal level needs to be held low for about 0 5 seconds before the preset signal is recognized The time required to change the instrument settings depends on the contents of the selected preset TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics Outputting an Alarm Signal When you enable the mainframe GPI the TG700 can output an alarm signal from pin 6 on the 10 BASE T connector when an internal error occurs Since the output signal is an active low the signal level for pin 6 goes from High to Low when any errors occur In addition you can specify a BLACK output on the AGL7 module as an alarm output NOTE The AGL7 must be running software version 4 6 or later to output an alarm signal Additionally the AGL7 hardware must be at Version 3 x or above to support outputting an alar
250. ignals and can be configured to provide a near infinite number of test patterns Six basic patterns are predefined Circle Diagonal Horizontal Sine Horizontal Sweep Vertical Sine and Vertical Sweep for convenience These patterns all have an overall or pattern control parameter Pattern control parameters are unique to the specific predefined signals and are only found as the first item of the specific signal menu User created zone plate signals saved as Custom 1 or Custom 2 do not have pattern control parameters The dependent parameters are common to all of the zone plate signals and are found below the pattern control parameter in the menu for each zone plate signal Altering the pattern control parameter will make changes to the test signal while maintaining the basic pattern For example the pattern control parameter for the Circle zone plate signal is the Circle Frequency parameter The Circle Frequency parameter controls the maximum frequency of the circle You may alter the Circle Frequency at will and the system will adjust four other dependent parameters to maintain the pattern as a circle However if you alter the underlying dependent parameters individually the pattern may change to be something other than a circle After changes have been made you can save the new signal as a custom zone plate signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 157 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Selecting a Zone Plate
251. ignals from the BLACK 1 connector BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal BLACK 3 Outputs the selected black burst signal or HDTV trilevel sync signal Alarm output When the mainframe GPI interface is enabled you can configure the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 connector to output an alarm When an alarm condition is detected the output signal from the selected connector turns off for about 60 ms The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the mainframe GPI is enabled and the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable See page 2 33 Using the Mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 5 Operating Basics Changing the Input Output configuration The CW connector is configured at the factory to be an input for CW signals You can reconfigure the connector to output a 48 kHz word clock signal by changing the position of an internal cable CAUTION To prevent damage to the mainframe and the module be sure to disconnect the power cord before removing the module To output a 48 kHz word clock signal from the CW connector 1 Disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector labeled J040 on the AGL7 module See Figure 2 6 2 Reconnect the cable to the connector labeled J960 on the AGL7 module 3 Place the 48 kHz CLOCK label provided with the module on the rear panel below the CW connector NOTE The word clock signal au
252. ing figure shows the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu Select any of the channels in the Channel AUDIO GROUP submenu DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Frequency 1000 Hz DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Inactive 300 Hz 1200Hz 4000Hz 12000 Hz Silence 400 Hz 1500Hz 4800Hz 15000Hz 50 Hz 500 Hz 1600 Hz 5000Hz 16000 Hz 100 Hz 600 Hz 2000Hz 6000Hz 20000 Hz 150 Hz 750 Hz 2400Hz 8000 Hz 200 Hz 800 Hz 3000Hz 9600 Hz 250 Hz 1000Hz 3200Hz 10000 Hz 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS OFF DVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 CH 1 Audio Click OFF lt gt 4 sec Figure 3 49 DVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 89 DVG7 Digital Video Generator Frequency Sets the audio signal frequency of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the frequency The selection items are as follows Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz When Inactive is selected the audio data output is disabled Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Amplitude Sets the audio signal amplitude of the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the amplitude You can set the value from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS i
253. is displayed it means the function is still tracking significant changes in the timing When Fine is displayed it means the function has stabilized to the point that the loop only needs to make small changes VOLTAGE MON 1 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range Warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 2 This diagnostic measures a voltage divider between a positive and negative supply If this diagnostic result is outside the nominal range Warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced PHASE DET RAMPS This diagnostic monitors voltage ramps used in the phase detector If these voltage ramps are outside the nominal range Warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced NOTE The following diagnostics ADC BUS GENLOCK INPUT LTC POS INPUT and LTC NEG INPUT are available only in modules with the BLACK I REF IN connector TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 139 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 140 ADC BUS This diagnostic displays the condition of the Genlock input circuit E Stuck A 12 bit display showing the bits stuck high H low L or OK m Short A 12 bit display showing any shorted adjacent lines SS NOTE For all bits to move the correct signal must be applied GENLOCK INPUT This diagnostic displays the following Mi
254. is menu to display which of the three frame reset signals is used by the output of the installed modules Use the up A or down F arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu NOTE The character after the module name represents the output connector of the module For example B1 represents the BLACK 1 connector Select FRAME RESET STATUS in the main menu TG 00 FR STATUS FRAME RESET 1 AN f 14 985 Hz a B1 B2 lt gt Select a module to be displayed a E RESETA lt Select a module to be displayed TG700 FR STATUS FRAME RESET 3 1 250 Hz BG7 2 B1 lt gt Select a module to be displayed Figure 2 19 FRAME RESET STATUS submenu FRAME RESET 1 Displays the module s and output s using frame reset signal 1 If two or more modules are using this frame reset signal use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select which modules are displayed FRAME RESET 2 Displays the module s and output s using frame reset signal 2 If two or more modules are using this frame reset signal use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select which modules are displayed FRAME RESET 3 Displays the module s and output s using frame reset signal 3 If two or more modules are using this frame reset signal use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select which modules are displayed TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform U
255. isable the embedded audio of the selected audio group m Select which audio channel to enable Set the emphasis status bits sampling alignment status bits and sample bits of the selected audio group Select any of the audio groups in the AUDIO EMBEDDED main menu HDVG x AUDIO GRP 1 Disable Status Enable lt gt Enable 7 F ENTER HDVG x AUDIO GRP ona lt gt 3 To AUDIO CHANNEL submenu 4 CANCEL HDVG7 x AUDIO GRP 1 lt gt EMPHASIS Emphasis NO EMPHASIS CCITT HDVG x AUDIO GRP 1 Sampling Frame HDVG x AUDIO GRP 1 Resolution 24 bits Figure 3 107 HDVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu Frame 1 gt Frame without Frame Number Asynchronous 24 bit lt I gt Deis 3 226 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator Status Enables or disables the generation of embedded audio for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Selects the audio channel for which you will change the parameters Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1 2 3 or 4 Select any audio channel and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu See page 3 227 Emphasis Sets the emphasis status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select N
256. item logo text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 55 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 60 VIDEO Sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signal when a GBR signal is being output and enables or disables the signal output from CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 62 Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up down left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s lt 1 gt Set the number of samples to be scrolled AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE i 1 gt Set the number of lines to be scrolled V Step 0 Line s AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Period 1 Frame s AWVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Random Disable a ee Set the period in frames to be scrolled Disab ee joe Figure 3 28 AWVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu H step Sets the number of samples to be scr
257. ithout a button push If this happens press and hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button for about 1 second to restart the time out counter and enable the front panel buttons The indicator next to the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button lights when the front panel buttons are enabled NETWORK Displays the current network parameters of the mainframe or sets the network parameters for the 1 OBASE T port on the mainframe Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to toggle between Information and Setup When you select Information and press the ENTER button you will access the NETWORK INFORMATION submenu See page 2 26 When you select Setup and press the ENTER button you will access the NETWORK SETUP submenu See page 2 27 DIAGNOSTICS Executes the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and installed modules When you select DIAGNOSTICS and then press the ENTER button you access the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 3 139 CAL OVEN Calibrates the frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator without removing the instrument from service This menu item appears only when the mainframe has software version 5 1 or above installed and when there is GPS7 module installed in the mainframe Select CAL OVEN and then press the ENTER button to access the CAL OVEN submenu See page 2 29 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Use this menu to assign signal sets to a specific front panel test signal button
258. its 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 2 2 12 bits TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 209 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator 3 210 Table 3 39 HDLG7 module sample structure depth signal formats cont 1920 x 1080 formats 2K 1080 and 2K 1556 formats 2K GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 2K XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits NOTE When the 1080 50p 1080 59 94p or 1080 60p format is selected the HDLG7 module forces the sampling structure to 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits and no other sampling structure is allowed Selecting Projector Test Pattern while the format is 2K 1080 or 2K 1556 will limit the sampling structure depth to 2K XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits If the current output format is 1080 23 98sF 1080 24sF 1080 23 98p 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 29 97p 1080 30p 1080 50i 1080 59 94i or 1080 60i you may select 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits as the sampling structure However the output signals produced on Link A and Link B are not dual link signals The HDLG7 module will produce two single link outputs with incoming ancillary and embedded audio being placed on Link A and none on Link B ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Sets the alpha channel signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Use Y G Channel 0 Flat Field 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 70 Flat
259. king If this warning message appears disconnect the power cable from the AC voltage line and contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative FAN FAULT ALARM Main Cooling Fan Serious Problem While the warning message appears the front panel buttons are disabled You can operate the buttons temporarily by pressing the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button until the indicator next to the button lights After five minutes of not using the front panel the warning message will reappear and disable the front panel buttons TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 17 Operating Basics Using the Mainframe Menus When you power on the TG700 and the initializing process for all of the installed module is completed the top menu item of the mainframe main menu appears on the LCD display Press the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the available menu selections in the main menu The mainframe main menu allows you to access submenus to set the various system settings The following figure shows the mainframe main menu Power on the TG 00 mainframe To PRESET Submenu To SEQUENCE Submenu To FRAME RESET STATUS Submenu To UTILITY Submenu CANCEL ENTER TG700 UTILITY CANCEL Figure 2 16 Mainframe main menu PRESET Recalls instrument settings saved as a preset or saves the current instrument settings as a preset When you select this menu item and then press the ENT
260. l reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 26 APL Sets the APL and Bounce features available for the test signal output from the SIGNAL connector Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the APL submenu See page 3 27 SELECT OUTPUT Use this menu to set the video format signal and timing offset for the BLACK 1 Submenu BLACK 2 or BARS output You can also use this menu to set the ID text overlay for the BARS output The following figure shows the SELECT OUTPUT submenu Select SELECT OUTPUT in the main menu ATG x SELECT FORMAT NTSC ATG x 4 TIMING ATG x as ID TEXT Figure 3 11 ATG7 module SELECT OUTPUT submenu NTSC ENTER NTSC No Setup To SELECT SIGNAL submenu AL CANCEL To TIMING submenu To ID TEXT submenu Available only when the BARS connector is selected CANCEL SELECT FORMAT Selects the video format for the selected output Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select NTSC NTSC No Setup or PAL NOTE When you change the video format synchronization shock will occur the video format changes immediately at the output as you change the format selection Select the format you want then press the front panel ENTER button to access the SELECT SIGNAL submenu where you select the output signal to use See page 3 23
261. l 1 11 Getting Started Figure 1 6 Securing the module Removing a Module To remove a module from the mainframe perform the following procedure CAUTION To facilitate module removal attach terminations or BNC cables to the module connectors The connector may be damaged if too much force is applied to it during module removal 1 Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the mainframe rear panel 2 Attach 75 Q terminations or BNC cables to the BNC connectors on the module to be removed Module removal becomes easier if the terminations or cables are attached to the connectors at the left and right ends 3 Use a screwdriver with a 1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws securing the module to the mainframe CAUTION Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module when you remove the module from the mainframe 4 Pull the module slowly toward you while supporting the terminations or BNC cables attached to the connectors See Figure 1 7 1 12 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual _ Getting Started Figure 1 7 Removing the module 5 If this empty slot will not be used you must attach a blank panel to the mainframe to control instrument cooling and EMI emissions Align the blank panel with the open slot of the mainframe b Tighten the two screws to secure the blank panel to the mainframe A blank panel is available as an optional accessory for the TG700 mainframe Ref
262. l be placed on the Link A output and the other 8 channels two groups will be placed on the Link B output Link B Only Places the incoming embedded audio on the converted mode Dual Link B output In the case of converting 1920x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz to 2048x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz with 16 channels four groups of embedded audio the two lowest number embedded audio groups groups 1 and 2 will be allowed on Link B Groups 3 and 4 would be deleted Link A amp B Places the incoming embedded audio on the converted mode Dual Link A and B outputs In the case of converting 1920x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz to 2048x1080p PsF 29 97 30 Hz with 16 channels four groups of embedded audio the two lowest number embedded audio groups groups 1 and 2 will be allowed on both Link A and B Groups 3 and 4 would be deleted 4 Press the CANCEL button to return to the main menu NOTE When you select the converter mode the 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN setting will automatically switch to HD Test Signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 207 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator HDLG7 Module Main Menu Use the HDLG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks Set the sampling structure pixel depth Select the signal of the alpha channel m Set the timing offset between the Link A and Link B outputs m Generate a moving picture Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure
263. l height bars of white yellow cyan green magenta red 75 Color Bars 100 White blue and black This pattern is available with three variations at 75 Color Bars 75 White 100 value for all bars at 75 value for colors and 100 for white and at 75 value for all bars SMPTE EG1 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE EG 1 1990 This pattern includes 75 color bars reverse blue bars and Q sections black white and pluge sections Note that this pattern is only available for YCbCr formats since the I and Q sections contain color components outside of the legal RGB gamut SMPTE RP219 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE RP 219 2002 This pattern is intended for 16x9 aspect ratio displays with additional elements as compared to EG1 bars The HD3G7 implementation includes I and Q sections but unlike the similar sections in EG1 bars they have additional luminance to stay within RGB gamut SMPTE EG432 1 Color Accuracy Split screen color bars using values from SMPTE RP 431 2 2007 The upper half of the pattern is essentially the same as 100 color bars corresponding to the 1 set of colors defined in Table A 4 of the RP The lower half is a set of desaturated color bars corresponding to the 2 color patch values TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 151 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Table 3 33 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in
264. l provides a better way The H Sweep Zoneplate pattern control parameter is the H Sweep Frequency which controls the upper frequency limit of the sweep the swept to frequency Simply adjust the H Sweep Frequency until the system roll off is at 3 dB Read the frequency directly from the TG700 display Em The H Sine Zoneplate which provides a constant frequency horizontal sine signal instead of a swept signal can be used to reduce error in measuring attenuation at a given frequency Set the Horz Frequency parameter to a low value and measure the amplitude of the entire line Next calculate the 3 dB point 0 707 x the low frequency amplitude Finally increase the Horz Frequency parameter until the system response for the whole line is at the calculated 3 dB level and read the 3 dB frequency directly from the TG700 display m Since the ZP Amplitude parameter is adjustable for each of these signals you can measure the response at 100 60 or any other level as needed These same techniques can be used to measure vertical or diagonal response by selecting the appropriate zoneplate signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 169 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator HD3G7 Module Main Menu Use the HD3G7 module main menu to perform the following tasks 3 170 Set the video signal output mode Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Change the sample structure and color
265. lable OUTPut 1 2 SYNThesizer SIGNal BUILd This command rebuilds the XML signal library and will detect any newly added signals Reinstalling the Factory Default Signal Sets To reinstall the factory default signal sets perform the previous procedure to install the signal set files from the following directory on the TG700 SW Library and Documentation DVD Module Test Signal Library gt HD3G7 Signal Library gt Standard Signal Set After you reinstall the standard signal sets delete the enhanced signal set file s from the HD3G7 SIGNAL directory and then reboot the instrument TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Zone Plate Signals HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Zone plate video test patterns or simply zone plates have become important tools for the evaluation of modern video processing systems and techniques They are called zone plates because the classical circular pattern looks like an optical zone plate which uses the principles of Fresnel diffraction to focus and intensify light Today however the name has been applied to a wide variety of stationary and moving test patterns The following figure shows two enlarged optical zone plates The white areas are transparent and the black areas are opaque The precise spacing of the rings focuses and intensifies light that passes through the plate Figure 3 76 Optical zone plates enlarged The HD3G7 module generates electronic zone plate s
266. le If a splitter is used on the antenna it may appear as a short at DC but will still pass through the RF signal which will allow the GPS to function The status will read Open if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used REFERENCE Selects the timing reference and the response for a loss of lock to the timing reference Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the REFERENCE submenu See page 3 116 SELECT OUTPUT Selects which output to configure for signal format timing and timecode parameters Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the output you want to configure BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK submenu See page 3 119 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GPS SETUP Sets GPS signal parameters and sets the level at which a warning message will be generated if the GPS signal quality deteriorates Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the GPS SETUP submenu See page 3 124 TIME SETUP Provides access to several submenus for setting timing parameters for the module Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following submenus and then press the ENTER button to access the selected submenu TIME OF DAY menu Use this submenu to set the module time of
267. le 3 34 This pattern control parameter is unique to the zone plate signal it is associated with 3 160 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator When you first enter the zone plate parameters menu for a signal the pattern control parameter for that signal is displayed The pattern control parameter controls the basic pattern frequency by adjusting the dependent parameters For example if you change the CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency the generator adjusts four of the dependent parameters to keep the circle round Table 3 34 Zone plate pattern control parameters Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter Parameter definition Circle Diagonal Circle Frequency maximum c aph Diagonal Frequency equivalent c aph The circle frequency is actually the equivalent of the maximum vertical sinusoid frequency at the very top and bottom of the screen see the discussion of the Ky 2 parameter Adjusting the circle frequency has the simple effect of increasing or decreasing the maximum frequency at the outer edges of the pattern However this adjustment actually changes the coefficients of four of the zone plate parameters to keep the pattern round and centered on the screen The diagonal frequency is 2 times the vertical and horizontal frequencies c aph Adjusting the diagonal sine frequency changes both the KX and KY coefficients H Sine Horizontal Frequency MHz Th
268. le TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu ccc cece eee ene eee eee eeeee ees 3 193 Figure 3 95 HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu 0 0 0 cece eee e cece eee e ee eeeeeeenees 3 194 Figure 3 96 Front panel test signal buttons 00s ce ece eee ee eee eee ence eee eeeeeneteetaeeneeees 3 203 Figure 3 97 HDLG7 module main menu ccece nent ee eee eee ene en eee eeaeeneteetaeeneeees 3 208 Figure 3 98 HDLG7 module LINK OFFSET submenu 0 cccece cece ence eee eeeeeeeeennaes 3 211 Figure 3 99 HDLG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu cccceee cece eeeeeeeeeaaes 3 211 Figure 3 100 Front panel test signal buttons 00s cee cee ce eee ee eee ence ence eeenetee eae eneenees 3 216 Figure 3 101 HDVG7 module main menu 0 cece cee nce ee eee eee ene ee eee eeaeenetee ee eneeaees 3 218 Figure 3 102 HDVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneenees 3 220 Figure 3 103 HDVG7 module OVERLAY submenu 0 cccecee eee e eee e eee eee eeaeeneennaes 3 221 Figure 3 104 HDVG7 module LOGO submenu 0c cece cee eee ne eee eee eee eee eeneennaes 3 222 Figure 3 105 HDVG7 module ID TEXT submenu 0 0 cece eee e cence eee eeeneeee eee eneenees 3 223 Figure 3 106 HDVG7 module CIRCLE submenu 00 0 cece cece eee eeeceeeeeeetee eae eneenees 3 225 Figure 3 107 HDVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu c cece ece
269. le is also installed in the mainframe TIMECODE SOURCE Disable 30 DROP Enable Drop Frame VITC OUTPUT Disable VITC 1 Line 14 VITC 2 Line 16 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 73 DVG7 Digital Video Generator DVG7 Digital Video Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the DVG7 Digital Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module Product Description DVG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 9 DVG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 23 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module The DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module is a digital video generator that provides NTSC composite digital signals and 525 625 component digital signals The module provides the following features 3 74 Two serial digital video outputs Two serial digital black outputs Option BK only Overlay of circle text or logo on the video signal Moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output signal Up to 16 channels of 2
270. le on the GPS7 module and should only be performed when the instrument is out of service Internal frequency calibration Use this menu to set the internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator This may be done without removing the instrument from service allowing you to compensate for oven drift while the instrument is in its operating environment This menu only appears when the mainframe has software version 5 1 or greater installed and when there is a GPS7 module installed TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 29 Operating Basics 2 30 The mainframe oscillator is calibrated by storing the current frequency of the oscillator while it is locked to a GPS or a reference video signal This stored frequency value is used when the instrument boots up and when there is a loss of signal lock and the instrument is configured to switch to internal timing The following figure shows the CAL OVEN submenu You can find a complete internal frequency calibration procedure in the Oven Calibration Procedures section See page 3 100 Select CAL OVEN in the UTILITY submenu Execute Calibration ENTER PONGE Execute calibration routine Yes ENTER No CANCEL Figure 2 25 Internal frequency calibration menu Press the ENTER button to execute the oscillator frequency calibration routine or press the CANCEL button to exit the menu Gain calibration Use this menu to characterize the oscillator frequency
271. le the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 3 AG7 Audio Generator Module CHANNEL PARAMETERS Submenu AUDIO VIDEO SYNC Selects the frame reset signal that is synchronized with the digital audio signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to make the selection The selection items are Free Run Frame Reset 1 and Frame Reset 2 For Free Run the audio signal is not synchronized with any of the frame reset signals Press the ENTER button to enable the selection NOTE If the frame reset signal used by the audio signals is reset by the change of the video format the audio signal timing is also reset AUDIO TIMING Sets the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the genlock signal or the internal reference signal Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO TIMING submenu See page 3 5 AUDIO TIMING Submenu Use this menu to set the frequency amplitude and audio click of the selected audio channel Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu From CHANNEL PARAMETERS in the main menu A av AGT x CHANNEL 1 Audio Click OFF v AG x CHANNEL 1 Frequency 1000 Hz AG x CHANNEL 1 Amplitude 20 0 dB Inactive 300 Hz 1200Hz 4000HzZ 12000 Hz Silence 400 Hz 1500Hz 4800Hz 15000Hz 50 Hz 500 Hz 1600Hz S5000Hz 16000 Hz l
272. lect Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 7 ATG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS Shows the signal format and NTSC SMPTE Color Bars signal name output from the SIGNAL connector OUTPUT BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL Black Burst OUTPUT BARS FORMAT NTSC SIGNAL SMPTE Color Bar ID TEXT Status Disable TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 msec APL Mode APL OFF Period 1 0 sec 3 28 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AVG7 Analog Video Generator AVG7 Analog Video Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the AVG7 Analog Video Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module Product Description AVG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 7 AVG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 19 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module The AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The TG700 platform must be running
273. les Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization of all the installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes Generator function 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 main menu shown below appears HDLG x STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 6 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the 1080 59 94p format and then press the ENTER button 7 Press the COLOR BAR button to select SMPTE RP219 Color Bars and then press the CANCEL button to return to the main menu 8 Connect the upper LINK A connector to the INPUT A connector on the HDTV waveform monitor using a 75 Q BNC cable 9 Connect the upper LINK B connector to the INPUT B connector on the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable 10 Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT A signal 11 Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed 12 Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT B signal 13 Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed 14 Change the BNC cable from the upper LINK A connector to the lower LINK A connector TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started 15 Change the BNC cable from the upper LINK B conn
274. lue from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 177 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator AUDIO EMBEDDED Use this menu to select the audio group For HD SDI and 3G Level A mapping Submenu you may select audio group 1 2 3 or 4 For 3G Level B mapping you may select audio group 1 2 3 or 4 for both Link A and Link B Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to make the selection When the desired audio group and Link are displayed press the Enter button to access the menu for that group In each group you can enable or disable the embedded audio select a specific channel and set the sampling mode Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items Press the ENTER button to select a specific channel While in the Audio Channel submenu you can set the embedded audio frequency amplitude and click rate for the channel The following figure shows the AUDIO EMBEDDED Audio Group submenu See Figure 3 86 Select AUDIO in the MAIN menu 1 DISABLE ENABLE HD3G7 x AUDIO GRP x STATUS DISABL
275. m Time output can be used TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module DIAGNOSTICS Submenu Use this menu to view operation parameters for the GPS7 module Because many sync sources are never turned off it makes sense to check them periodically These menus allow access to some internal nodes to forewarn of impending problems Module diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu Select DIAGNOSTICS in the main menu TEMPERATURES GPS Temp xxxx TUNE Phase xxxx DAC xxxx GPS Temp 42 8 C VOLTAGE MON 2 5V relative to 3 3V xxx eT PHASE DET RAMPS Up A kxxx B xxxx PHASE DET RAMPS Down A xxxx B xxxx Figure 3 74 GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu TEMPERATURES This diagnostic displays the temperature of the GPS7 module TUNE This diagnostic displays the following m Phase The phase between the GPS pulse per second and the internal master time A Tektronix Customer Service Representative may request these values for troubleshooting installation issues should they occur DAC The DAC code that is tuning the oscillator Useful for checking if a unit is getting close to the end of the oven oscillator tune range GPS lock indicator Displays the GPS lock state When Boot is displayed it means the function is still in special modes needed to get started When Coarse
276. m signal The alarm signal is output when one of the following internal errors occurs The fan stops working GPI alarm only A genlock signal is not connected m The TG700 does not lock to a genlock signal The frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference shift considerably and the TG700 is near loss of lock The alarm signal output can be enabled using the GPI ALARM OUTPUT and AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT menu items in the UTILITY submenu These items appear only after the mainframe GPI is enabled See page 2 41 See page 2 42 NOTE After the instrument is powered on it takes about three minutes to detect a stable error signal this time is required to stabilize the temperature in the temperature controlled oven in the internal reference oscillator You can see the remaining time before the alarm becomes effective in the AGL7 main menu as shown below AGL x GENLOCK STATUS Genlock Alarm 120 seconds to Enable 1970 190 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 37 Operating Basics 2 38 ALARM menu When the mainframe GPI is enabled the ALARM menu items are displayed in the UTILITY submenu instead of the NETWORK menu item Use the ALARM menu items to enable or disable the alarm signal output to reset the alarm signal output or to display the alarm status The following figure shows the ALARM menu T6700 UTILITY FRONT PANEL DISABLE Time Out Off De ee all
277. make 60 I second GPS readings with at least four satellites to acquire the position How long this takes depends on various conditions If there are less than four satellites a reading cannot be taken SIGNAL WARNING This function provides a warning that the antenna signal has degraded Set this level below the normal range experienced as a function of time of day weather or other variables To configure the output warning see the GPO submenu See page 3 138 GPO Submenu Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the FOM quality of the GPS signal value that will trigger warning indicators See page 3 105 Figures of Merit FOM TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 125 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module TIME OF DAY submenu Use this menu to set the source for the time of day setting and to set the date and time that will be used when the GPS reference is set to internal The following figure shows the TIME OF DAY submenu Select the TIME OF DAY menu in the main menu A GPS7 x TIME SETUP TIME OF DAY SOURCE Internal Internal lt gt vite input GPS Signal gt REF IN only Synchronize once REF IN Synchronize now only Follow GPS x TIME SETUP TIME OF DAY Mode Synchronize once GPS7 x TIME SETUP TIME OF DAY Internal 2010 01 21 01 00 00 V 1970 205 Edit the internal time and day
278. menu Select SELECT LTC in the main menu A 23 98fps ae 30fps drop frame 30fps 30fps drop frame p Disable lt gt Time of Day Program Time GPS7 x LTC x SOURCE Time of the Day GPS7 x LTC x OFFSET 00 00 00 00 GPS7 x LTC x TIMING GPS7 x LTC x OUTPUT LEVEL Level 5 0 Volt J 1970 206 Figure 3 70 GPS7 module LTC submenu A lt Editoffset V To LTC TIMING submenu lt gt Edit level TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 135 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module TYPE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the following LTC output signal formats Table 3 19 LTC output signal formats Format Rate Delay range 23 98 24 fps at 23 98 Hz rate 20 85 ms 24 24 fps at 24 Hz rate 20 83 ms 25 25 fps at 25 Hz rate 20 00 ms 30 30 fps at 30 Hz rate 16 67 ms 30 DF 30 fps drop frame at 29 97 Hz 16 68 ms rate SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the following LTC signal sources Disable Disables the LTC outputs Time of Day Uses the Time of Day counter as the timecode Program Time Uses the Program Time counter as the timecode OFFSET Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the LTC offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected
279. menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu See page 3 39 TIMING Sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 44 VIDEO Sets the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output and enables or disables the signal output from CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 45 APL Sets the APL and Bounce features available for the signal output When you select this menu item and then press the ENTER button you will access the APL submenu See page 3 47 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 37 AVG7 Analog Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Submenu Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up down left right or randomly Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu 1 gt Set the number of samples to be scrolled AVG7 x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s AVG7 x MOVING PICTURE V Step 0 Line s AVG7 x MOVING PICTURE Period 1 Frame s lt gt Set the number of lines to be scrolled A D gt Set the period in frames to be scrolled Disabl lt D Eee
280. ming control for each output Full remote control using Ethernet interface NOTE PAL M and PAL N are not supported by the AGL7 ATG7 and BG7 modules TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 17 ATG7 Analog Test Generator Operating Procedure After the ATG7 module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 i Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that there are no error messages on the display After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the ATG7 module main menu appears as shown below ATG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars pn gt Select the signal format and the test signal that you want to output from the SIGNAL connector See page 3 19 Selecting an Output Signal Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus to select the signal format and test signal you want to output from the BLACK 1 BLACK 2 and BARS connectors and to set the other output parameters Refer to ATG7 Module Main Men
281. mode is selected The output is a 1 485 Gb s SMPTE 292 compliant signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator MOVING PICTURE Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal Submenu up down or left right or randomly when in generator mode Use the up A or down V arrow button to scroll through the menu shown below Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s lt d gt Set the sample number to be scrolled HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE V Step 0 Line s La HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE lt Set the frame period be scrolled Period 1 Frame s lt Set the Line number to be scrolled HD3G7 x MOVING PICTURE lt gt Disable Random Disable N Enable J 1970 232 Figure 3 85 HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu NOTE Moving picture mode is not available with zone plate signals However zone plate signals may be defined with motion in the zone plate parameters See page 3 158 Modifying a Zone Plate Signal H Step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V Step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the va
282. mory Requirements The GPS7 and HD3G7 modules require that the TG700 mainframe have at least 32 MB of memory installed and software version 5 2 or above installed If your mainframe has 32 MB of memory and you load the TG700 memory with signals from the Frame Picture Generator application you may not be able to upgrade the instrument to software version 5 2 If you receive a memory error while attempting to upgrade the software version you need to either delete some of the Frame Picture Generator signals or upgrade you instrument to 64 MB of memory NOTE Option FP provided extra memory which allowed the TG700 mainframe to support the Frame Picture Generator application This option is no longer necessary for new TG700 mainframes If you have an older mainframe with less than 64 MB of memory you can increase the memory in your mainframe to 64 MB by ordering the following upgrade kit 040 1698 xx Contact your local Tektronix representative for more information 1 2 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Accessories Options Getting Started The following table lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the TG700 mainframe and modules Table 1 1 Standard and optional accessories Tektronix Accessory Std Opt part number TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 071 1970 xx One of the following Option LO English Option LO or Japanese Option L5 071 1971 xx Option L5 TG700
283. n Loss of Lock Enables or disables the AGL7 module alarm when the TG700 does not lock to a genlock signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection m Near Loss of Lock Enables or disables the AGL7 module alarm when the frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference shift considerably and the TG700 appears to be near loss of lock Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to implement the selection 2 42 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Inspection and Cleaning Operating Basics Inspect and clean the instrument as often as your operating conditions require The collection of dirt can cause instrument overheating and operational failure Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipation Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that can cause an instrument failure especially under high humidity conditions CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use only deionized water when cleaning the front panel controls Use a 75 Isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Avoid the use of high pressure compressed air when cleaning dust from the interior of this instrument High pressure air can cause Electro Static Di
284. n The minimum value from the genlock ADC for the present input signal m Max The maximum value from the genlock ADC for the present input signal LTC POS INPUT This diagnostic displays the following Min Raw The minimum raw ADC values of the positive LTC input m Max Raw The maximum raw ADC values of the positive LTC input LTC NEG INPUT This diagnostic displays the following m Min Raw The minimum raw ADC values of the negative LTC input m Max Raw The maximum raw ADC values of the negative LTC input TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Factory Default Settings GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module The following table shows the factory default settings for the GPS7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 20 GPS7 module factory default settings Submenu Menu item name item name Settings REFERENCE SOURCE GPS Signal LOSS LOCK Stay current frequency ACTION HOLDOVER Stay legal RECOVERY SELECT OUTPUT Black 1 INPUT OUTPUT Output Black 2 Black 1 only NOTE INPUT OUTPUT selection for Black 1 is Black 3 not available on earlier GPS7 modules without the REF IN input connector SELECT NTSC FORMAT TIMING Vertical 0 lines offset Horizontal Coarse 0 us Horizontal Fine 0 ns TIMECODE Source Disable Offset 00 00 00 00 30 Drop Disable 30 Drop Frame VI
285. n 1 dBFS steps Audio click Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel The audio tone if any is turned off for an interval around the audio click Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are OFF 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec and 4 sec Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click rate When Audio Click is valid Audio Tone is turned off for 0 25 second around the click For example if you select 3 see for the click rate the audio tone will be output for 2 75 seconds and silent for 0 25 second the click occurs during this silence When Audio Click is OFF the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu is output continuously Audio Click makes it easy to identify any channel s of the four output channels 3 90 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual TIMING Submenu DVG7 Digital Video Generator Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu DVG7 x TIMING Vertcal 0 Line s 1 gt Set the vertical timing DVG7 x TIMING Horizontal 0 0000 psec 1 gt Set the horizontal timing 1970 191 Figure 3 50 DVG7 module
286. n Field 2 to carry the ancillary payload Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to set the line number This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Sample Offset Use this menu selection to set the sample number where the ancillary data header will be This is the first word of the ancillary data packet Video Channel Use this menu selection to set the video channel to Luma or Chroma Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to make the selection and then press the ENTER button to confirm it Link Location Use this menu selection to set the link location to Link A or Link B Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to make the selection and then press the ENTER button to confirm it This menu selection is available only in 3G B formats Stream Location Use the left lt 4 and right arrow buttons to select HD Stream 1 or HD Stream 2 and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu selection is available only in 2xHD formats NOTE This is an example only Inserting an AFD packet will not affect the video Ancillary Payload Example produced by the HD3G7 module As an example one of the ancillary data payloads that can be easily generated by the HD3G7 module is the Active Format Description AFD AFD is a method of identifying the active area of the video picture to be
287. n a duplicate of the Y or G channel data or a flat field signal This menu item appears only when the sample structure is set to A for 3G signal formats Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select Use Y G Channel or to select a 0 to 100 Flat Field in 10 increments and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 173 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 174 2xHD STREAM CONTENT Selects the content for the first and second HD signals on link A and link B This menu item appears only when the signal format is set to 2xHD Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select either Test Signal Test Signal or Test Signal Black and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 177 MOVING PICTURE Submenu AUDIO EMBEDDED Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital signals Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 or Group 4 Once the group is selected press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu See page 3 178 AUDIO EMBEDDED Submenu If Level B mapping is selected all four groups are available in both Link A and Link B for a total of eight groups TIMING Sets the timing offset of the
288. n temporarily disrupts the frequency of all signals in the box 1 Connect a GPS signal to the antenna input on the rear of the module 2 Cycle the mainframe power by unplugging the power cord from the rear of the instrument and then holding the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button while plugging the power back into the instrument Continue to hold the button during start up until TG700 Start up with factory mode shows on the LCD display Allow the instrument to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes Press the MODULE button until GPS7 STATUS appears Check that the signal status shows Locked ao a Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine a Press the up A arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS b Press the ENTER button c Press the right arrow button to select TUNE d Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display 7 Press the MODULE button until TG700 appears 8 Press the up A arrow button to select UTILITY 9 Press the ENTER button 10 Press the up A arrow button to select CAL OVEN SELECT 11 Press the right arrow button to access the Gain Calibration submenu 12 Press the ENTER button to calculate the gain value 13 Wait approximately 20 seconds for the process to end The result will be displayed 14 Press the ENTER button to return to the Gain Calibration menu 15 Press the CANCEL button to exit the Gain Calibration menu 16 Wait approximately two minutes for the GPS contr
289. nd black The effect will be similar on either line or field display of a waveform monitor Typically a small Kr coefficient is set to add apparent motion to a standard circle sine wave or sweep pattern To see the picture effects of this parameter select any of the standard zone plates and vary Kr Note that the Kr coefficient may be positive or negative the sign will determine the direction of the pattern s motion K Parameter Display name KT 2 T Sweep Units cycles per second per second c s 2 The Kr T Sweep parameter sets the change in temporal frequency over time If Kx is initially 0 0 setting Ky 2 to 1 0 will result in an apparent K of 10 0 after ten seconds 20 0 after twenty seconds and so forth The temporal frequency will increase to maximum return to 0 0 and repeat the cycle as long as the value of Kr 2 remains greater than zero TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 167 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 168 Y G X Parameter Cb B Y Parameter Cr R Z Parameter Waveform Shape Parameter T Reset Parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components the Y component for a YC C sample structure the G component for a GBR sample structure or the X component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF This parameter displays one of the three signal components the C component for a YC C sample structu
290. nfigure how the instrument responds when there is a loss of lock to the GPS signal and how the instrument responds when the signal is recovered Ability to configure how the instrument responds when there is a loss of lock from the black signal input Ability to configure how the instrument synchronizes to an incoming VITC signal when VITC is selected as the time of day reference TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Operating Procedure After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe 2 Watch the display for messages during the boot process Messages are displayed for a few seconds If a serious error is detected during boot the module menus will not be displayed 3 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the GPS7 module main menu appears It will look similar to what is shown below GPS7 x STATUS GPS No Signal GPS 1980 01 06 0 00 00 00 1970 250 5 Configure the GPS7 module as required for your installation See page 3 100 C
291. nframe Memory Requirements Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 203 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is configured to output HD test signals The table also lists the native YCbCr or RGB test signals that correspond to HD SDI video test signals Table 3 37 HDLG7 module HD test signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 12 LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Staircase Ramp Valid Ramp 2 FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 60 Flat Field 70 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field 100 Flat Field MULTI BURST SWEEP MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 75 Red Field 100 Green Field 75 Green Field 100 Blue Field 75 Blue Field Convergence PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T30 Pulse and Bar TIMING SDI Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Use this button to select the converter mode of operation and Embedded audio selection menu See page 3 206 Selecting the Converter Mode 1
292. nly trained personnel should perform service procedures N CAUTION When you enable the mainframe GPI do not connect the TG700 to a network The network might be damaged NOTE When you enable the mainframe GPI you cannot perform network operations such as sending and receiving remote commands or downloading signals After you enable the mainframe GPI be sure to apply the GPI label provided with the instrument to the rear panel to show that the instrument cannot connect to a network Enabling the The mainframe GPI is enabled by changing the jumper settings of the connectors Mainframe GPI J000 J002 J004 J006 and J008 on the A10 MAIN board Since the A10 MAIN board is located inside the chassis you must remove the top cover to change the jumper settings Perform the following procedure to enable the mainframe GPI You need a screwdriver with a 2 Phillips tip to remove the top cover WARNING To avoid electrical shock remove the power cord before removing the top cover Failure to remove the power cord can result in serious injury or death 1 Disconnect the power cord from the TG700 2 Remove the screws securing the top cover to the instrument 3 Lift the top cover off the instrument Depending on the version of your instrument you might need to slide the top cover toward the rear before lifting it off the instrument See Figure 2 28 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 33 Operating
293. ntents Modules AG7 Audio Generator Module 0 2 cece cece cence eee e nent ence tence eee estes eee eneeneeneeeaeeeneenaes 3 1 Product Descripul Ons rscescnsncndcarsnenie e E EE Ea EEE ETE E E EEE 3 1 Operating Procedure 5 ecssccisinkiaeviesioueeabens E n T a a o e r aon 3 2 AG7 Mod le Maim Menu ic4 5 c cccndieis ceinaoncibiantsdadundwdssaduatdbaisaiodhis aa aE 3 3 Factory Default Settings ccein n E EEE A E G 3 6 AGL7 Analog Genlock Module 0 cece ccc ncene enn nnn nee nn enn E nen EE EEE tne ened 3 7 Product Description eranen E E EE aa ddamarndeaucec bond OEE E EEE 3 7 Operating Procedure mercenier iio r EOE O E EE OER Oe 3 8 AGL7 Module Main Menubecssicccsaatiacnisdensdetansdudivel iadasaunted hasasadohid eiaacatabineat chad Mans 3 9 Factory Default Settings ssaniu dav ce deeded eos amedaadecddalendadeadd voddadavwalencasaeete 3 16 ATG7 Analog Test Generator yic2s ces cots csaaaccetads scans KE santa baedid lagadsaniessanneuetes EEEE S 3 17 Product DesCripllONeraseccsnacinvccansnanie naddvene sear E EE gus utes EEEE EE EESE 3 17 Operating ProGedures iccc casein ndtedae cand stinnadidasaetusagadane cackae da saebndded dois seed dese ae eterdeces 3 18 Selecting an Output Signal srias ii nn a csneentsnd natnadhiunas oovaucvsbbaasaweneate 3 19 ATG7 Module Main Menu ccece eee ne ee eee eee ence nee ee eeeeee eee eeeeneeneeneeeeeeeeneed 3 21 Factory Default Settings ce ssaceccdatsacsince cccas Suan scents sage c
294. ntly being generated 1080 59 94p Indicates the output format YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits Indicates the output sampling structure Converter Mode The following figure shows an example STATUS display when the module is in the converter mode HD3G7 x CONVERTER 3G A 1080 59 941 YCbCr 4 2 2 10b 1970 233 m Converter 3G A Indicates that the incoming HD SDI video stream is being converted TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 175 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator OUTPUT MODE Submenu 3 176 1080 59 94i Indicates the incoming signal format If there is no input or the format is not the correct rate the following messages will appear on the second line of the LCD No Input Signal or Input Signal Error Check FORMAT YCbCr 4 2 2 10b Indicates the output sampling structure Select Level A or Level B as the serial link multiplexing method or select HD mode Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select from the Level A Level B or HD choices listed below Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The following figure shows the OUTPUT MODE submenu HD3G7 x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p Palins 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 rs i me A a He aa 3G Level B 1920 x 1080 3G Level B 2K x 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 1080 3G Level B 2xHD 720 HD 1920 x 1080 HD 1280 x 720 Figure 3 84 HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu Level A This is on
295. nts cont Parameter Description Altitude Operating To 4 5 km 15 000 feet Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 C each 300 m above 1 5 km Nonoperating To 15 km 50 000 feet Leave space for cooling by ensuring standard side clearance for rack mounting or 2 inches 5 1 cm of side clearance for benchtop use Also ensure sufficient rear clearance approximately 2 inches so that cables are not damaged by sharp bends For complete specifications for the instrument refer to the TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference provided on the CD that shipped with your instrument The TG700 operates from a single phase power source with the neutral conductor at or near earth ground The line conductor is fused for over current protection A protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation CAUTION The instrument does not have a power switch When you connect the power cable to the AC line connector the instrument powers on AC Power Requirements Check that your location provides the proper electrical power requirements as listed in the following table See Table 1 4 Table 1 4 AC line power requirements Parameter Description Line Voltage Range 100 240 VAC 10 Line frequency 48 Hz 63 Hz Maximum power 100 W Connecting the power cable Connect the power cable to the instrument first and then connect it
296. nu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and download it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG700 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu AVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO X Position lt 0 0 APH lt gt Set the horizontal position AVG x OVERLAY LOGO Y Position 0 0 APH AVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO lt gt Set the vertical position Logo OFF gt Select OFF or a logo AVG7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters ENTER Save the display position for the logo Figure 3 20 AVG7 module LOGO submenu X position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled SAVE
297. nu OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 222 ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 223 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 225 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay m Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 221 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 3 222 LOGO Submenu Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the display position of the logo Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you ne
298. nu 3 79 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 82 Operating procedure 3 75 OVERLAY submenu 3 83 Product description 3 74 Rear panel connectors 2 9 SIGNAL 1 connector 2 9 SIGNAL 2 connector 2 9 TIMING submenu 3 91 VIDEO submenu 3 92 E Environmental operating requirements 1 7 External reference indicator 3 105 F Factory default settings HD3G7 3 197 Fan failure 2 17 Features 1 1 Figures Of Merit FOM 3 105 FORMAT button 2 2 FRAME RESET 1 2 15 FRAME RESET 2 2 15 FRAME RESET 3 2 15 Frame reset signals 2 15 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual FRAME RESET STATUS submenu 2 22 Front panel Operation 2 1 FRONT PANEL ENABLE button 2 2 Functional checks 1 13 AG7 1 13 AGL7 1 14 ATG7 1 17 AVG7 1 19 AWVG7 1 20 BG7 1 21 DVG7 1 23 GPS7 1 24 HD3G7 1 33 HDLG7 1 36 HDVG7 1 37 G General Purpose Interface Mainframe See GPI GPI Mainframe 2 33 Setting 2 33 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module See GPS7 GPS7 10 MHz connector 2 11 ALARM DELAY submenu 3 134 ALARM TIME submenu 3 133 ANTENNA connector 2 10 Antenna power 3 124 Antenna system 3 103 BLACK 1 connector 2 11 BLACK 2 connector 2 11 BLACK 3 connector 2 11 BLACK submenu 3 119 DIAGNOSTICS submenu 3 139 DST SCHEDULE submenu 3 129 Factory default settings 3 141 Functional checks 1 24 GPI submenu 3 137 GPO submenu 3 138 GPS SETUP submenu 3 124 JAM SYNC submenu 3 131 LEAP SECOND submenu 3 132
299. nu to set timecode parameters for the module outputs This menu is only available when a GPS7 module is also installed in the instrument NOTE To display the TIMECODE submenu the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed and the hardware must be version 2 0 or above Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu Select TIMECODE in the main menu HDVG7 x TIMECODE SOURCE Time of Day A V HDVG7 x TIMECODE OFFSET 00 00 00 00 V 1970 198 Time of Day 1 gt Program Time Disable lt q gt Set the offset Figure 3 110 HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu SOURCE Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select the timecode source from the following choices Time of Day Uses the time of day as determined by the time of day menu selection See page 3 126 Program Time Uses the program time counter as the timecode Disable Disables the timecode function for the HDVG7 module OFFSET Use this menu item to set a time offset for the HDVG7 module outputs from the timecode input from the GPS7 module You can enter a time offset of up to 23 59 59 29 from the selected time source hours minutes seconds video frames Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the
300. o DIAGNOSTICS cmima O a CANCEL J 1970 218 Figure 3 55 GPS7 module main menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 113 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 114 STATUS Displays the status of the GPS7 module The top line displays the selected timecode reference and signal presence When the internal reference frequency is used as the timecode reference the top line displays Internal NOTE When GPS is set as the timecode reference the top line includes the Figure of Merit FOM rating for the relative strength of the GPS signal See page 3 105 Figures of Merit FOM The bottom line displays the additional status of the GPS7 module Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to view the following status displays Em Genlock amplitude and VITC line number Date and time of the currently used timecode reference UTC time display Program time counter GBPS signal quality and the number of satellites detected versus satellites usable NOTE Signal quality is an indicator of how well the GPS signal is being received It is a sum of the correlation for each of the satellites It can be used to evaluate the antenna and connecting cable but it can take a while for the receivers to recognize which satellites are available and stabilize at the final level Antenna power status Power OFF Open Short or Nominal NOTE A shorted GPS antenna will not damage the GPS7 modu
301. ol loop to recover before cycling the instrument power and putting the instrument back in service TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GPS Antenna The GPS7 module requires an external antenna to receive signals from satellites Requirements You must set up an antenna system to provide the GPS signal as an input to the module You can configure the instrument to provide 3 3 V or 5 V DC power for the antenna AN WARNING Prevent risk of shock or fire by ensuring that the GPS antenna is protected from lightning strikes when it is mounted outside a building or facility The GPS7 module and TG700 mainframe do not have isolation protection from lightning so the facility installation must provide suitable protection for the GPS antenna external to the TG700 mainframe Failure to use appropriate precautions can result in injury or death N CAUTION To avoid antenna damage do not turn on the DC antenna power until you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage Antenna damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select When a GPS feed is first connected to the antenna input on the module it can take several minutes for the signal quality to reach its nominal potential How long that takes depends on such things as antenna site cable plant design and available satellites Excluding those variables the typical time to acquire sa
302. oll through the menu The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu Disable Enable AVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE sates ae X Position 0 0 APH et the horizontal position AVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position AVG x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 22 AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in 1 steps Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle The diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 43 AVG7 Analog Video Generator TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust
303. olled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 60 to 60 in 4 sample steps V step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 15 to 15 in 1 line steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual OVERLAY Submenu AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Use this menu to select an item logo ID Text or circle to overlay on the output test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu Select OVERLAY in the main menu AVWWVG7 x OVERLAY OBJECT Logo AWVG7 x OVERLAY BLINK OFF ENTER Logo To LOGO submenu ID Text To ID TEXT submenu Circle CANCEL To CIRCLE submenu OFF Fast Slow Figure 3 29 AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform U
304. ols See H Sine H Sweep V Sine V Sweep Custom 1 Custom 2 page 3 157 Zone Plate Signals TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 153 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Table 3 33 HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signals in the signal set Description MONITOR SMPTE 303M Color Reference Color reference chart per SMPTE 303M also known as the GretagMacbeth ColorChecker chart Note that cyan patch 18 cannot be reproduced properly in the RGB color space because the red component lies at approximately 14 which exceeds legal limits for RGB formats This patch will appear as a cyan and black checkerboard pattern where the cyan patches are of a different hue than the full cyan patch as seen in YCbCr or XYZ formats because the red component is clipped at 0 Black White Step Scale Gray scale patterns per 6 9 of SMPTE EG 432 1 2007 A series Black Dark Gray Step Scale of ten different monochrome patches at increasing luminance values is centered on a gray background to verify gray scale tracking Pluge and Luma Reference Includes two elements to assist in black and white balance The left side of the pattern contains a pluge pattern with three vertical bars of 2 0 and 2 black The right side of the pattern contains four gray boxes corresponding to luminance levels of 110 mV 200 mV 450 mV and 700 mV 100 white in the analog domain
305. omplete DC max DC sweeps per field sweeps Ky2 Ky 2 For example in a standard with 1080 lines per field a vertical sweep frequency of 2160 c aph2 would result in one complete frequency sweep down the picture 3 161 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Zone Plate Dependent Parameters Zone Plate Amplitude 3 162 Parameter Below the pattern control parameter in each of the parameter menus are the dependent parameters The dependent parameters are the same for all the zone plate patterns Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the parameter menu If desired use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the parameter NOTE Press the left 4 and right gt arrow buttons at the same time to reset any parameter to its default value If you adjust any one of the dependent parameters individually the pattern control parameter will become invalid and you will see this message 1970 246 The zone plate dependent parameters are discussed here in the order in which they appear below the pattern control parameter when using the down V arrow button to scroll through the parameter menu The Custom 1 and Custom 2 signal selections do not have pattern control parameters and start with the Zone Plate Amplitude Parameter Display name ZP Amplitude Units mV Use this parameter to adjust the zone plate signal amplitude from 0 0 mV to 798 0 mV in 0 5 mV increments The default val
306. on a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A a D MODULE COLORBAR LINEARITY FLATFELD MULTIBURST SWEEP FRONT PANEL ENABLE LJ O CJ LJ LJ Lj FORMAT MONITOR PULSEBAR TMING SDI OTER NT AEF CAOL e Figure 3 9 Front panel test signal buttons TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 19 ATG7 Analog Test Generator 3 20 The following table lists the ATG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set The list of available signals changes depending on the selected signal format Table 3 5 ATG7 signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set NTSC and NTSC No Setup formats COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step 10 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ramp Ramp Shallow Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field NTSC format only 10 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave Black Burst Black Burst with Field Ref MULTIBURST Multiburst 100 Multiburst 60 Multibu
307. on process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 37 Getting Started 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 main menu shown below appears HDVG x STATUS 1080 59 94 100 Color Bars 6 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a format then press ENTER 7 Press one of the front panel test signal button for example COLOR BAR to output a signal 8 Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable 9 Set the waveform monitor to view the signal 10 Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears 11 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector 12 Check that the signal appears as expected 1 38 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics Operating Basics This section introduces you to the basics of operating the TG700 Common module functions are discussed here while module specific functions are discussed in the module specifc sections of this manual This section contains the following topics Front panel controls Rear panel connectors About the frame reset signals Not
308. onal information about this module Product Description BG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 8 BG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 21 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified TG700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module The BG7 Black Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module is a multiformat black generator with the following features Four outputs for NTSC with or without setup or PAL black burst and HDTV trilevel sync signals Individual format and timing control for each output Black burst with field ID and NTSC PAL color bars signals output Option CB Full remote control using Ethernet interface Timecode generator with VITC when a GPS7 module is installed The BG7 module hardware must be version 1 2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5 1 or above installed NOTE PAL M and PAL N are not supported by the AGL7 ATG7 and BG7 modules 3 64 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual BG7 Black Generator Operating Procedure After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other loc
309. onfigure the GPS7 Module 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to GPS7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 112 NOTE Configure your GPS7 for your installation before putting it into service See page 3 100 Configure the GPS7 Module After you have configured the module save the configuration as the power on preset so that if power is lost the GPS7 will power on in the correct configuration See page 2 19 PRESET Submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 99 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Configure the GPS7 Module Oven Calibration Procedures 3 100 When you first receive your GPS7 module there are a few things you need to do and a few things you should know before putting it into service This section includes information about the following m Performing an internal frequency calibration Performing a gain calibration Understanding the GPS antenna system Understanding signal quality Understanding time flow Configuring module settings If you are installing a module into an existing mainframe you need to set the internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator and characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage before putting it into service This latter calibration can only be performed in factory mode when the in
310. onnector Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the frequency and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select from the following frequencies m 14 985 Hz NTSC and 59 94 Hz Group Uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 14 985 Hz m 6 250 Hz PAL and 50 Hz Group Uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 6 250 Hz 15 000 Hz 60 Hz Group Uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 15 000 Hz m 2 997 Hz 23 98 Hz Group Uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 2 997 Hz 3 000 Hz 24 Hz Group Uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 3 000 Hz Keep Composite Timing Keeps the synchronization shock small by using the previous NTSC or PAL timing whenever possible even if you change the genlock source to CW while the instrument is genlocked to a NTSC or PAL black burst signal The frame frequency is the same as the NTSC or PAL frequency that was previously used Use a 5 MHz 10 MHz 3 58 MHz for NTSC or 4 43 MHz for PAL signal as a CW signal source TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 11 AGL7 Analog Genlock Module OUTPUT Submenu Use this submenu to set the signal format and the timing offset for the output selected in the SELECT OUTPUT menu item Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the OUTPUT submenu Select SELECT OUTPUT in the main menu AGL 1 NTSC ENTER
311. operating at the maximum stability a Use the up A or down arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS b Press the ENTER button c Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select TUNE and check that the instrument shows Fine on the right side of the display 7 Press the CANCEL button to exit the Diagnostics menu Black output and frame pulse 1 Connect an SDI signal like one from a DVG7 or HDVG7 module to the SDI A input of a WFM7120 and select that input as the active input on the waveform monitor 2 Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the GPS7 module to the reference input of the WFM7120 Terminate the loop through on the monitor with a 75 Q terminator 3 Press the EXT REF button on the WFM7120 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 27 Getting Started 1 28 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Set Black 1 to NTSC on the GPS7 module a Use the up A or down arrow button to SELECT OUTPUT b Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black 1 c Press the ENTER button d Use the up A or down arrow button to SELECT FORMAT e Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC mh Press the ENTER button g Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Black Burst h Press the ENTER button i Press the CANCEL button to exit the NTSC submenu Check that the WFM7120 shows NTSC as the reference input Use
312. or at or near earth ground Only the line conductor is fused for over current protection A protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation WARNING Injury or death can occur as the result of electrical shock To avoid electrical shock do not connect power to the TG700 when the top cover is off Dangerous potentials are present on the Power circuit board The TG700 operates from an AC line frequency of 48 to 63 Hz over the range of 100 240 VAC 410 without the need for configuration See Table 1 4 on page 1 8 Use this port to connect to your local Ethernet network You can control the TG700 mainframe and all installed modules remotely through the port Also you can upload and download various files such as signal files logo files and preset files through the port The AG7 Audio Generator module is equipped with six BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 3 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 3 Operating Basics 48 kHz CLOCK Figure 2 3 AG7 module connectors 1 2 Outputs channels 1 and 2 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal 3 4 Outputs channels 3 and 4 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal 5 6 Outputs channels 5 and 6 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal 7 8 Outputs channels 7 and 8 of the selected AES EBU serial digital audio signal SILENCE Outputs a
313. ore than 20 ms when the GPS signal is recovered the module forces a jam phase timing recovery In genlock mode a jam sync may occur if the timing has drifted more than 20 us Stay Legal Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS signal while staying within the specified frequency offset and frequency rate of change specifications for NTSC and PAL reference signals NOTE It can take a long time for the module to recover in this mode since it takes about 300 seconds to correct each 64 us line of timing error Jam Phase Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS signal immediately but will typically cause a sync shock to the system m Fast Slew Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS signal at a rate 25 times faster than the legal rate without jumping TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module BLACK Submenu Use this submenu to configure the selected black output for signal format timing and timecode parameters The following figure shows the BLACK submenu Select the BLACK1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 output in the main menu 1 gt Output if allowed REF IN and Input Black 1 only NTSC 1080 24sF 1080 23 98p NTSC No Setup 108023 98sF 720 60p PAL 1080 30p 720 59 94p 1080 60i 1080 29 97p 720 50p 1080 59 94i 1080 25p 1080 50i 1080 24p To BLACK TIMING submenu To BLACK TIMECODE submenu 1970 201
314. orizontal frequency as a function of the vertical position in the video frame To see the effects of this parameter set the waveform monitor to view one selected line only Then with Kxy set to approximately 25 all other coefficients left at 0 0 look at line waveforms from top to bottom of the frame The horizontal frequency increases slightly on each succeeding line reaching 25 c aph on the last line of active video The result can be thought of as a vertically arranged sweep signal Ky Parameter Display name KY V Freq Units cycles per active picture height c aph The Ky V Freq parameter sets the initial vertical frequency of the pattern it is analogous to Kx rotated 90 clockwise To see the effects of this parameter set it to a low number and adjust a waveform monitor to view one or two fields of the HD3G7 output The variation in the dc voltage level from line to line will give the field waveform the appearance of a sampled sine wave especially at a Ky of around 5 to 10 c aph the sinusoid can become difficult to discern at higher frequencies Note that in the Y vertical parameters the c aph units translate directly into visible cycles down the frame The Vertical Sine zone plate is a Ky only zone plate See Figure 3 79 Figure 3 79 A Ky only zone plate TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 165 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Ky2 Parameter Display name KY 2 V Sweep Units
315. ot eliminated the alarm status is set again when you reset the status GPI ALARM OUTPUT Enables or disables the alarm signal output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection When the GPI alarm output is enabled an alarm signal is output from pin 6 of the 10 BASE T connector when any error is detected inside the instrument Since the output signal is an active low the signal level for pin 6 goes from High to Low when any errors occur GPI ALARM SELECT Selects which GPI alarms are enabled or disabled Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu See page 2 41 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 39 Operating Basics AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT Enables or disables the alarm output from one of the BLACK outputs on the AGL7 module Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Disable BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 When you select BLACK 1 BLACK 2 or BLACK 3 and an enabled error occurs the output signal from the selected connector turns off for about 60 ms When you select Disable the alarm output to the AGL7 module is disabled Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable AGL7 ALARM SELECT Selects which of the AGL7 alarms are enabled or dis
316. ou are familiar with both the zone plate pattern control parameters below and zone plate pattern dependent parameters See page 3 162 Zone Plate Dependent Parameters Perform the following steps to change a zone plate signal s parameters 1 Press the SWEEP button to enter the zone plate signal menu 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a zone plate signal from the provided six standard zone plate signals Circle Diagonal H Sine H Sweep V Sine and V Sweep or two user defined signals Custom 1 Zoneplate or Custom 2 Zoneplate 3 158 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 When the desired zone plate signal is displayed press the ENTER button to enter the zone plate parameter menu If Circle Zoneplate was displayed for example the display changes to HD3G x ZONE PLATE CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency x c aph 1970 245 which shows the zone plate signal CIRCLE SWEEP and the pattern control parameter Circle Frequency As mentioned earlier each of the standard zone plate signals have a pattern control parameter that is unique to that signal Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter Circle Circle frequency x c aph 1 Diagonal Diag Frequency x c aph H Sine Horiz Frequency x MHz H Sweep H Sweep Frequency x MHz V Sine Vert Frequency x c aph 1 V Sweep V Sweep Frequency x c aph 1 1 c aph cycles per
317. ows the ID TEXT submenu Select ID Text in the main menu or SELECT OUTPUT submenu Enable ATG x ID TEXT Blink Fast Status Enable Blink Slow Disable i VV ATG x ID TEXT X Position 0 0 APH ATG x ID TEXT Y Position 0 0 APH ATG x ID TEXT EDIT ATG x ID TEXT SAVE Set the horizontal position Set the vertical position A 1 gt Edit text V ENTER ENTER Save the text to the signal file Figure 3 13 ATG7 module ID TEXT submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator Status Sets the blinking mode of the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection m Enable Turns on the blinking function of the overlay Blink Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Blink Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals Disable Turns off the blinking function of the overlay X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt
318. p Bar TIMING Timing Bowtie 1 ns Marker SDI OTHER 1 The Valid Ramp signal is available in YPbPr format only TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AWVG7 Module Main Menu Use the AWVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator Set the logo text or circle overlay on the output signal Set the timing offset on the output signal Scroll the active picture area of the output signal Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a GBR signal is being output Enable or disable the output signal on the CH1 CH2 and CH3 connectors Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the AWVG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button AWVG 100 Color Bars x STATUS 1080 591 YPbPr To MOVING PICTURE submenu To OVERLAY submenu To TIMING submenu CANCEL CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER AWVG7 x VIDEO ENTER To VIDEO submenu CANCEL Figure 3 27 AWVG7 module main menu MOVING PICTURE Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING PICTURE submenu See page 3 54 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 53 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 54 MOVING PICTURE Submenu OVERLAY Selects an
319. p SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH YCbCr 4 2 2 10b OUTPUT MODE 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable AUDIO EMBEDDED Status Level A Group 1 4 Disable Status Level B Group 1 4 Link A Disable Group 1 4 Link B Disable Channel Status Active Frequency 1000 Amplitude 20 dBFS Audio Click OFF Channel Origin A1 1 through A4 4 Sampling Frame TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us Relative To Serial 0H TIMECODE Source Program Time 30 Drop Frame Enable ATC LTC OFF ATC VITC OFF TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 197 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator 3 198 Table 3 35 HD3G7 module factory default settings cont Menu item name Settings VIDEO Y ON Cb ON Cr ON Edge Filter Enable AV Timing Mode OFF ANC PAYLOAD Output Disable Parity Automatic DID 0x101 SDID 0x200 DC 0x101 UDW 0x200 CS 0x200 Auto Calculate CS Enable Line 9 Field 1 Line 9 Field 2 Line 9 Start Sample 1928 Video Channel Luma Link Location Link A Stream Location HS Stream 1 SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Enable TRIGGER OUTPUT System Clock SECONDARY OUTPUT Test Pattern TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video
320. p Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Black Burst Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 IRE Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 6 MHz Sweep SinX X MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge 75 Red Field Convergence Pattern Grey Window Monitor Matrix Monitor Setup White Window PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 1T Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar TIMING SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test PLL Test SDI Matrix OTHER Other FCC Composite FCC Multiburst NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 77 DVG7 Digital Video Generator 3 78 Table 3 15 DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons cont Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set 525 270 format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 3 Channel Ramp 5 Step B Y Valid Ramp Limit Ramp Modulated Ramp Oversize Ramp R Y Valid Ramp Shallow Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Valid Ramp Y Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field Field Square Wave MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep SinX X MONITOR Monitor 2 Level Ped amp Pluge 4 Level Ped amp Pluge Convergence
321. pear when you attempt to output serial digital signals and or analog trilevel black signals using the 74 25 MHz clock and 74 25 1 001 MHz clock simultaneously The HD clock may be used by the following modules AGL7 AWVG7 BG7 GPS7 HDLG7 and HDVG7 For example if you have a BG7 module installed and you attempt to set the HDTV trilevel sync signal format for the BLACK 1 output to 1080 59 941 when the HDTV trilevel sync signal format for the AGL7 module BLACK 2 output is set to 1080 50i the following message appears HD Clock Select Disable 74 25 MHz iJ Yes ENTER No CANCEL r This message asks if you want to disable the 74 25 MHz clock that is currently in use by the AGL7 module Press the CANCEL button to cancel the new format setting or press the ENTER button to enable the clock and signal format change If you enable the clock change you need to change the signal format for the AGL7 output s that were using the clock you disabled N CAUTION The HDLG7 module does not generate the Clock Select warning message when you change the signal format on the HDLG7 module and create a clock conflict with other modules using the HD clock Fan Failure Warning Message CAUTION Ifthe fan on the rear panel stops working internal components could be damaged To prevent this damage disconnect the power cable from the AC power source The TG700 displays the following warning message if the fan on the rear panel stops wor
322. pears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Press the CH B button on the waveform monitor Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Press the CH C button on the waveform monitor Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appears Press the CH A button on the waveform monitor Press the test signal button again to output another test signal in the same signal set Check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes You do not need to perform this check for the CH 2 and CH 3 connectors Disconnect the BNC cable from the upper or lower CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors and then connect the BNC cables to the lower or upper CH 1 CH 2 and CH 3 connectors Repeat steps 10 through 18 for the lower or upper output channels BG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the BG7 Black Generator module Check is functional Required equipment NTSC PAL waveform monitor HDTV waveform monitor 75 Q BNC cable TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 21 Getting Started 1 22 Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initializa
323. plied to any test signal AV Timing Mode Turns the AV Timing Mode on or off Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection In the AV Timing mode the video and audio are continuously cycled between being on as configured for 1 second then set to black and muted for 4 seconds Use this signal to measure the AV delay through a system with the AV Timing mode on an appropriate Tektronix waveform monitor or rasterizer TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 185 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator ANC PAYLOAD Submenu 3 186 The ancillary payload can carry non video information such as an Active Format Description AFD Closed Caption information or other metadata NOTE The ancillary inserter can place the data packet anywhere in the field and can overwrite any of the ancillary or video data with a few exceptions the inserter will not overwrite embedded audio or CRC Use care to not overwrite important information Use this menu to set the ancillary payload structure The ancillary payload can include information to supplement the video stream including the Data Identifier DID Secondary Data Identifier SDID Data Count DC User Data Words UDW and a Checksum CS The Data Identifier DID and Secondary Data Identifier SDID indicate the type of data contained in the packet The Data Count indicates the number of User Dat
324. press the ENTER button Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Internal and then press the ENTER button Check that INT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights This shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal Connect one of the TV signal generators output connectors to the AGL7 REF connector using the 75 Q BNC cable Terminate the other side of the REF connector with the 75 Q termination Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the menu item corresponding to the input signal and then press the ENTER button Check that EXT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights This shows that the instrument is locked to the input signal Disconnect the BNC cable from the REF connector Check that EXT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel blinks This shows that the external reference signal is not being input to the REF connector TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 15 Getting Started Black signal outputs Press the front panel CANCEL button Press the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT from the main menu Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BLACK 1 then press the ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu shown below appears AGL 1 BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTSC 17 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select NTSC or PAL for your w
325. ps to install the enhanced signal sets 1 Install the TG700 SW Library and Documentation DVD into the DVD drive on your computer 2 Using the DVD browser navigate to the following directory Module Test Signal Library gt HD3G7 Signal Library gt Enhanced Signal Set The Enhanced Signal Set directory contains the following files Monochrome Fields xml includes all monochrome flat fields from 0 to 100 in 10 increments Color Fields xml includes color fields for six primary and secondary colors at both 100 and 75 values SMPTE RP431 2 Color Patches xml includes full field patterns for each of the Black White and Black Dark Gray steps plus the 1 and _2 color patches 3 Use the TG7Comm application to locate and copy the desired signal set file s from the DVD to the HD3G7 SIGNAL directory on your TG700 generator Instructions for using TG7Comm are located in the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference Tektronix part number 077 0138 XX NOTE If you load the Monochrome Fields xml and Color Fields xml enhanced signal sets on your TG700 generator you can delete the Flat Fields xml file from the HD3G7 SIGNAL directory since it contains a duplicate copy of a subset of the Monochrome Fields xml and Color Fields xml patterns 4 After you load the new signal set file s on the TG700 generator you must either reboot the TG700 or perform the following SCPI command before the new signals will be avai
326. puts that include SMPTE 352 payload m Supports a wide variety of output formats 1920 x 1080i 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080PsF 2K x 1080p 2K x 1080PsF and 2K x 1556PsF TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 199 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator Operating Procedure 3 200 Supports the following sampling structures 4 4 4 GBR 4 4 4 4 GBR A 4 4 4 YCbCr 4 4 4 4 YCbCr A 4 2 2 YCbCr 4 2 2 4 YCbCr A 4 4 4 XYZ Test signal buttons have two modes of operation native YCbCr or RGB HD video test signals and native XYZ digital cinema projector test patterns only in 2K formats Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal Adjustable timing offset between link A and link B outputs Full remote control using the Ethernet interface After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 p Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MOD
327. r mode 3G Level B 2xHD 720 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X Table 3 28 HD3G7 Generator mode HD SDI 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 29 HD3G7 Generator mode HD SDI 1280 x 720 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 2 2 10b X X X X X X X X TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 147 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Select the Converter Mode Table 3 30 HD3G7 Converter mode 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 formats Use this mode to convert an HD SDI signal to a 3G SDI signal 1 Choose a compatible input and output from the following three tables and then connect the input signal to the SDI IN connector on the HD3G7 module Configure the output mode signal format and sample structure as described on the following pages See page 3 149 Select the Output Mode Press the OTHER test signal button to initiate the converter mode NOTE Press any other test signal button to cancel the converter operation and return the instrument to generator mode
328. r restrictive rights legend appearing in or on the copy of the Program as received from Tektronix Customer may not 1 Use the Program on more than one machine at any one time unless covered by a floating user license or separate site license 2 Transfer the Program to any person or organization outside of Customer or the corporation of which Customer is a part without the prior written consent of Tektronix except in connection with the transfer of the equipment within which the programs are encoded or incorporated 3 Export or re export directly or indirectly the program any associated documentation or the direct product thereof to any country to which such export or re export is restricted by law or regulation of the United States or any foreign government having jurisdiction without the prior authorization if required of the Office of Export Administration Department of Commerce Washington D C and the corresponding agency of such foreign government 4 For object code Programs only reverse compile or disassemble the Program for any purpose or 5 Copy the documentation accompanying the Program For Programs designed to reside on a single machine and support one or more additional machines either locally or remotely without permitting the Program to be transferred to an additional machine for local execution the additional machines shall be considered within the definition of single machine For programs permitting the
329. r right gt arrow button to select 1080 59 94p and then press the ENTER button 26 Press the OTHER button to select the converter mode 27 Press the CANCEL button to return to the STATUS menu which should now look like the one below HD3G7 x CONVERTER 3G A 1080 59 941 YCbCr 422 10b 28 Check that the STATUS display shows 1080 59 54i as the input 29 Press the up A arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu 30 Press the ENTER button to access the DIAGNOSTICS menu and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button if necessary to navigate to the DIAGNOSTICS PLL STATUS page 31 Check that the Jit reading shows Lock 32 Press the right arrow button to display the CRC Errors submenu and monitor the CRC error counts for five seconds 33 If there are CRC errors press the right arrow button until you see the Clear CRC Errors menu and then press the ENTER button to clear the errors 34 Press the right gt arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that the voltage readings show OK 35 Check that a 1080 59 94p ramp signal is displayed on the waveform monitor TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 35 Getting Started HDLG7 Module Functional Check Use the following procedure to check that the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module is functional Required equipment HDTV digital video generator HDTV waveform monitor Three 75 Q BNC cab
330. rator Mode The HD3G7 module has two modes of operation converter or generator To select an output signal perform the appropriate procedure below for your selected mode of operation Use this mode to generate either 3 Gb s SDI or 1 5 Gb s HD SDI video test signals 1 Select the output mode for the signal See page 3 149 Select the Output Mode 2 Select the signal format for the output signal See page 3 150 Select the Signal Format 3 Select the sample structure and depth for the output signal See page 3 150 Select Sample Structure and Depth 4 Select the test signal that you want to generate See page 3 151 Select the Test Signal Table 3 21 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 Structure 59 941 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X YCbCr 4 2 2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10b X X X GBR 4 4 4 12b X X X X X X X X 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X GBR A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 3 22 HD3G7 Generator mode 3G Level A 1280 x 720 Structure 59 94i 50i 60i 23 98p 24p 25p 29 97p 30p 50p 59 94p 60p 23 98psf 24psf 25psf 29 97psf 30psf YCbCr 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X YCbCr A 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X GBR 4 4 4 10b X X X X X X X X GBR A 4 4 4
331. re the B component for a GBR sample structure or the Y component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF This parameter displays one of the three signal components the C component for a YC C sample structure the R component for a GBR sample structure or the Z component for an XYZ sample structure Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to set the component to ON or OFF NOTE When the sampling structure for the current format uses the YCbCr color space the default settings enable only the Y channel This results in the familiar black to white zone plate patterns When the RGB color space is used the default settings enable all three channels also resulting in the black to white zone plate patterns A colored zone plate pattern can be created by enabling or disabling individual channels When the XYZ color space is used the resultant patterns will show some chroma in all combinations of the X Y Z channel settings due to the inherent encoding of this color space Use the Waveform Shape parameter to set the waveform to a Sine Triangle or Square wave Use the T Reset parameter to reset the time coordinate t in the zone plate equation of the pattern to zero When the T Reset parameter is first set to Enable the time coordinate is reset to zero and there is no apparent motion in the zone plate even if any of the time coefficients Kxr Kyr Kr or
332. re 3 15 ATG7 module APL submenu MODE Sets the output mode of the APL signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select the mode and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The choices are E APL OFF Outputs the selected signal without making any changes High APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 100 flat field signal and then outputs them Low APL Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines for NTSC or 4 lines for PAL and changes the lines except the last line to the 0 flat field signal and then outputs them APL Bounce Outputs the High APL signal and Low APL signal alternately for the period set in the PERIOD menu item Bounce Outputs the 100 flat field signal and 0 flat field signal alternately regardless of the selected signal for the period set in the PERIOD menu item PERIOD Sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in APL Bounce or Bounce mode Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the interval You can set the value from 0 5 seconds to 2 0 seconds in 0 5 second steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 27 ATG7 Analog Test Generator Factory Default Settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the ATG7 module These settings are recalled when you se
333. rear panel fan is installed then only one other high power module may be installed with it When the maximum number of these high power modules are installed the lower power modules AG7 ATG7 AVG7 BG7 DVG7 or HDLG7 may be installed in any of the remaining available slots AG7 HDVG7 DVG7 AGL7 _ OO EOKA Ox Ea a Ke E Y O 2 Figure 1 3 TG700 slot numbering 3 Use a screwdriver with a 1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws of the blank panel attached to the slot you want to use and then pull it away from the instrument Save the blank panel for future use See Figure 1 4 If you are installing a new module into a slot that already contains a module remove the existing module See page 1 12 Removing a Module 1 10 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Figure 1 4 Removing the blank panel CAUTION Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module when you insert the module into the mainframe 4 Insert the module into the slot paying attention to the module orientation See Figure 1 5 Push the module into the slot until the connector board of the module is firmly engaged with the Main board of the mainframe Figure 1 5 Installing the module 5 Tighten the two screws to secure the module to the mainframe See Figure 1 6 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manua
334. required Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE The LEAP SECOND menu is only available when GPS is the Reference source TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ALARM TIME Submenu GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Use this menu to schedule alarm times relative to program time Using the GPI connector this feature can be used to drive a light or similar indicator of alarm occurrences at a specific time in a program Use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the ALARM TIME submenu Select ALARM TIME menu in the main menu A GPS7 x TIME SETUP ALARM ENABLE OFF ON I of GPS x TIME SETUP ALARM SETUP A 5 Alarm Time 00 00 00 1 gt Edit time 7 CANCEL V Figure 3 68 GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu 1970 222 ENABLE Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to turn ON or OFF the Alarm Time function SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the Alarm Time schedule to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down Y arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required Press the ENTER to confirm the change TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 133 GP
335. right arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to set the ID Press the ENTER button to confirm the Channel Origin ID Sampling Use this menu to set the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group s Audio Control Packet ACP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Frame Frame without Frame Number and Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down V arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the main menu HD3G7 x TIMING Vertical 0 Line s HD3G7 x TIMING Horizontal 0 0000 usec HD3G7 x TIMING re Relative To Serial 0H s gt Set the relative timing 1970 255 1 gt Set the vertical timing lt gt Set the horizontal timing d V Figure 3 88 HD3G7 module TIMING submenu Vertical Sets the vertical timing offset Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the timing offset You can set the value from 1 2 to 1 2 frame in 1 line steps NOTE A line of timing refers to the timing as if it were a raster scanning a CRT This
336. rm monitor and then reconnect it to the HDTV waveform monitor TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 18 19 Getting Started Check that the appropriate HDTV trilevel sync signal is displayed Repeat this procedure for the BLACK 2 BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs DVG7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the DVG7 Digital Video Generator Check module is functional Required equipment Serial digital waveform monitor m 75 Q BNC cable Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the power source The initialization process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the DVG7 main menu shown below appears DVG7 x STATUS 525 270 100 Color Bars 6 10 11 12 Press the FORMAT button and use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select a format then press the ENTER button Press one of the front panel test signal buttons for example COLOR BAR to output a signal Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the serial digital waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the signal Check that the signal appears as expected For example if you selected a color bar signal in step 7 check that the color bar signal appea
337. rogram time you wrote down before The time on the display should have reset to the default start time of 00 00 00 00 and now be counting again TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Genlock 1 Set the Reference Source to Internal a Use the up A or down arrow button to select REFERENCE b Press the ENTER button c Ifneeded use the up A or down arrow button to select SOURCE d Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Internal Check that the INT REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights This shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select NTSC Burst Press the ENTER button Check that the INT REF indicator is not lit and the EXT REF indicator is flashing This shows that the is not locked to any reference signal Press the CANCEL button to exit the Reference Source menu Connect the NTSC signal generator output to the BLACK 1 REF IN connector using a 75 Q BNC cable Set the NTSC signal generator to output an NTSC signal Check that the EXT REF indicator lights This shows that the instrument is using the external reference signal 10 Disconnect the test setup HD3G7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Check Generator module is functional Required equipment m HD SDI video signal generator 3 Gb s w
338. rovided with the instrument and then apply it to the rear panel See Figure 2 30 io BASE T 100 240V 50 60Hz 120VA j J m A amp x a 2 2 A AG7 ao D N Figure 2 30 Applying the mainframe GPI label to the rear panel TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 35 Operating Basics Pin Assignments of the 10 BASE T Connector 123 6 10 BASE T connector Recalling a Preset The following figure shows the pin assignments of the 10 BASE T connector when the mainframe GPI is enabled Use pins 1 2 and 3 to input signals for recalling a preset Use pin 4 to output an alarm signal Frame ground is used for the ground return When using a shielded LAN cable shielded twisted pair cable you can use the shield of the cable as ground Table 2 3 Pin assignments of the 10 BASE T connector for the mainframe GPI Pin number Function Level 1 2 and 3 Input High gt 1 4 V or open connected to an internal 10 kQ pull up resistor Low lt 0 4 V or ground input impedance 10 kQ 6 Output Low lt 0 4 V or ground when sinking 100 ma maximum on resistance 4 When you enable the mainframe GPI you can recall one of the seven presets by combinations of signal levels for pins 1 2 and 3 of the 10 BASE T connector The following table shows the combinations of s
339. rs Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector and then connect the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector Check that the signal appears as expected TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 23 Getting Started GPS7 Module Functional Use the following procedure to check that the GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Check Timecode module is functional NOTE Depending on which other modules are present and what formats they generate you may get a clock conflict message If this occurs press the ENTER button to accept the change and continue the test This may happen at multiple steps in one or several of the functional tests Required equipment GPS antenna feed with good signal level m SDI video signal source can be external or a DVG7 or HDVG7 module in either a reference instrument or the mainframe under test NTSC black source can be a second TG700 mainframe with a BG7 or GPS7 module WFM7120 with Option CPS Voltmeter LTC GPIO breakout adapter cable Tektronix part number 012 1717 XX Female XLR connector three wires and one 9 pin DSUB male header with solder cups assembled as described in the LTC Output test BNC to banana plug adapter m 2 75 Q coaxial terminators Tektronix part number 011 0163 XX m 2 BNC T connectors m 3 1 meter BNC cables Procedure 1 Install the module into the TG700 mainframe See page 1 9 2 Power on the TG700 mainframe by connecting it to the po
340. rs signal in step 7 check that the color bars signal appears TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 1 17 Getting Started BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs 12 Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL connector and then connect it to the BLACK 1 connector Press the up A or down arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT from the main menu Press the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select BLACK 1 Press the front panel ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu shown below appears ATG x BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTSC 16 17 Press the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select NTSC or PAL Press the ENTER button The SELECT SIGNAL submenu shown below appears ATG x BLACK 1 SELECT SIGNAL Black Burst 18 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Black Burst Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2 connector Press the front panel CANCEL button twice to return to the main menu Repeat steps 14 through 20 to check the BLACK 2 output BARS output 24 Move the BNC cable from the BLACK2 connector to the BARS connector Press the CANCEL button twice to return to the main menu Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select BAR
341. rst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep Chroma Frequency Response MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 75 Red Field 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window Safe Area Monitor Setup PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar Window 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X OTHER Other FCC Composite FCC Multiburst NTC7 Combination NTC7 Composite Matrix 1 SNG Color Bars PAL format COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step 10 Step Modulated 5 Step Modulated 10 Step Modulated Pedestal Modulated Ramp Ramp Shallow Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 40 Flat Field 50 Flat Field 100 Flat Field Field Square Wave Black Burst Black Burst with No Field Ref Field Square Wave MULTIBURST Multiburst 100 Multiburst 60 Multiburst Multipulse SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 60 Sweep MONITOR Monitor 100 Red Field 75 Red Field 2 Level Pedestal amp Pluge 4 Level Pedestal amp Pluge Convergence Pattern Grey Window White Window Safe Area Monitor Setup Matrix PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2T Pulse amp Bar Sin X X OTHER Other CCIR 17 CCIR 18 CCIR 330 CCIR 331 UK ITS 1 UK ITS 2 UK 1 Line ITS ITS Matrix 1 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator ATG7 Module Main Menu Use the ATG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks m Set the text overlay on the
342. rtical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 ms VIDEO Y ON Pb ON Pr ON AV Timing Mode OFF TIMECODE requires GPS7 module be installed in mainframe SOURCE Disable Option BK BLACK FORMAT 1080 59 94i BLACK SIGNAL Black BLACK AUDIO GRP 1 to GRP 4 Status Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 24 bits BLACK AUDIO CH 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF BLACK TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 ms TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Index Index Symbols and Numbers 10 BASE T port 2 3 A AC line voltage requirements 1 8 Accessories optional 1 3 standard 1 3 AG7 1 2 connector 2 4 3 4 connector 2 4 48 kHz CLOCK connector 2 4 5 6 connector 2 4 7 8 connector 2 4 AUDIO TIMING submenu 3 5 AUDIO VIDEO SYNC submenu 3 4 CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu 3 3 3 4 Factory default settings 3 6 Functional checks 1 13 Main menu 3 3 Operating procedure 3 2 Product description 3 1 Rear panel connectors 2 3 RESOLUTION submenu 3 3 SILENCE connector 2 4 AGL7 BLACK 1 connector 2 5 BLACK 2 connector 2 5 BLACK 3 connector 2 5 CW connector 2 5 Factory default settings 3 16 Functional checks 1 14 GENLOCK submenu 3 9 3 10 Main menu 3 9 Operating procedure 3 8 OUTPUT submenu 3 12 Product description 3 7 Rear panel connectors 2 5 REF connector 2 5 SELECT OUTPUT submenu 3 9 SIGNAL submenu 3 13 STATUS submenu 3 9 TIMING
343. s You must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets Black to White 1 Black to White 2 Full frame monochrome flat fields representing the individual Black to White 3 Black to White 4 steps in the SMPTE EG 432 1 step scale patterns available under Black to White 5 Black to White 6 the MONITOR button Black to White 7 Black to White 8 These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You Black to White 9 Black to White 10 must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals Black to Gray 1 Black to Gray 2 See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets Black to Gray 3 Black to Gray 4 Black to Gray 5 Black to Gray 6 Black to Gray 7 Black to Gray 8 Black to Gray 9 Black to Gray 10 Red 1 Field Red 2 Field Full frame color flat fields representing the individual colors in Green 1 Field Green 2 Field the SMPTE EG 432 1 color accuracy patterns available under Blue 1 Field Blue 2 Field the COLOR BAR button Cyan 1 Field Cyan 2 Field These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You Magenta 1 Field Magenta 2 Field must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals Yellow 1 Field Yellow 2 Field See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets MULTIBURST a No test signals are currently available for the MULTIBURST signal set SWEEP Circle Diagonal Sine Zone plate test signal with real time parametric contr
344. s available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument When a GPS7 module is installed it controls this function Offset Use this menu selection to set a Timecode Offset for the HD3G7 module outputs This is an offset from the timecode input from a GPS7 module Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode Use the left lt 4 and right P arrow buttons to position the cursor and then use the up A and down arrow buttons to adjust the offset Press the ENTER button to confirm the offset This selection is available only when a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument 30 DROP Use this menu to enable or disable the 30 Drop Frame Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable 30 Drop Frame and Disable 30 Drop Frame Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection This menu selection is available only for non integer frame rates ATC LTC Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Linear Time Code Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection ATC VITC Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Vertical Interval Time Code Use the left lt 4 and right gt arrow buttons to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 183 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Vi
345. s Disable Emphasis No Emphasis Sampling Frame Resolution 20 bits BLACK AUDIO CH 1 to CH 4 Frequency 1000 Hz Amplitude 20 0 dBFS Audio Click OFF BLACK TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal 0 0000 us BLACK VIDEO Resolution 10 bits EDH ON TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module This section describes the module specific functions of the GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module Refer to the following locations for additional information about this module GPS7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 10 GPS7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 24 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 97 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Product Description 3 98 The GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module provides the following features E Integrated GPS receiver that can serve as the system timing reference m Three analog black vi
346. s SDI Video Generator SECONDARY OUTPUT Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between a Test Signal or a Black output for the secondary bottom BNC connector See page 3 193 SECONDARY OUTPUT Submenu DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics shows operation parameters for the module and allows you to clear the counts of CRC errors that are detected in the input signal This menu provides status information only and does not affect operating behavior Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu See page 3 194 DIAGNOSTICS Submenu CALIBRATION Provides a variety of special signals to help measure amplitude and rise time and allows you to adjust serial output amplitude This menu is accessible in factory mode only See page 3 196 CALIBRATION Submenu STATUS Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample structure Examples of the STATUS display are shown below for each of the operating modes generator and converter Generator Mode The following figure shows an example STATUS display when the module is in generator mode HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 1 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 257 Figure 3 83 HD3G7 module STATUS menu in generator mode 75 Color Bars 100 White Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated 3G A Indicates the 3 Gb s signal and the level curre
347. s demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities EN 55103 1996 Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use E Environment E2 commercial and light industrial Part 1 Emission EN 55022 1987 Class B radiated and conducted emissions EN 55103 1 1996 Annex A Radiated magnetic field emissions m Part 2 Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 2001 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2003 Electrostatic discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity Electrical fast transient burst immunity Power line surge immunity Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Voltage dips and interruptions immunity EN 55103 2 1996 Annex A Radiated magnetic field immunity EN 61000 3 2 2006 AC power line harmonic emissions EN 61000 3 3 1995 Voltage changes fluctuations and flicker European Contact Tektronix UK Ltd Western Peninsula Western Road Bracknell RG12 1RF United Kingdom TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual xiii Compliance Information EMC Compliance Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC Safety Compliance EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing Canadian Certification Additional Compliances Equipment Type xiv Meets the intent of Dire
348. sAYAS diNS 13S440 31N jesyo INOZ SWIL Ya INGSHOS ASYL NOILVWYOSNI OAS dV FONVHO 1Sa Aldd OAS dVJ1 AWIL WHV TY ANIL WVeoOu d WL 13S440 ANTWA LASAY LASS Jepeey OLIA LAS SWIL TWWNUYALNI YAY SdO ndui asn iagram flow block di ime T Figure 3 54 3 107 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module GPS RCVR The GPS signal can be selected as the source for a time of day clock used for timecode outputs and as a phase reference for video outputs The GPS signal carries the time represented as the number of weeks and number of seconds since the GPS Epoch 0 00 00 UTC January 6 1980 For example 12 00 00 UTC on November 5 2008 is represented as 1504 weeks plus 302 400 seconds An additional 14 leap seconds that have passed between January 1980 and November 2008 are also signalled in messages from the GPS satellite system Internal Time Set If you want to set Time Setup to internal mode enter the current date and time and then set the Time Setup to Internal in order to transfer that time to the Master Time The time zone offset and leap second information is used to convert local time to a master time that is equivalent to GPS time This allows the Epoch and SNTP processes to work the same for both internal and GPS time modes Set the local time zone offset before setting the internal time VITC Reader
349. scharge ESD Instead use low pressure compressed air about 9 psi Exterior Inspection Using the following table as a guide inspect the outside of the instrument for damage wear and missing parts You should thoroughly check instruments that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused to verify correct operation and performance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument Table 2 5 External inspection check list Item Inspect for Repair action Cabinet and front panel Cracks scratches deformations Replace defective module damaged hardware Front panel buttons Missing or damaged Repair or replace missing or defective buttons Connectors Broken shells cracked insulation Replace defective modules clear or wash deformed contacts and dirt in connectors out dirt Accessories Missing items or parts of items bent pins Replace damaged or missing items broken or frayed cables and damaged frayed cables and defective modules connectors TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 43 Operating Basics Exterior Cleaning Perform the following steps when you clean the exterior of the instrument WARNING To avoid injury or death unplug the power cord from line voltage before cleaning the instrument Avoid getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning Use only enough liquid to dampen the cleaning cloth 1 Remove loose du
350. se the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file 3 86 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator CIRCLE Submenu Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set its position on the display Use the up 4 or down F arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu Select Circle in the OVERLAY submenu DVG x OVERLAY CIRCLE Disable Status Enable Enable DVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE sates ae X Position 0 0 APH et the horizontal position DVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Y Position 0 0 APH Set the vertical position DVG7 x OVERLAY CIRCLE Diameter 10 0 APH Set the diameter of the circle Figure 3 47 DVG7 module CIRCLE submenu Status Enables or disables the circle overlay Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the circle The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 50 0 to 50 0 in
351. ser Manual OBJECT Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following overlays and then press the ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay Logo Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 56 E ID Text Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a specified position See page 3 57 Circle Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay the output signal See page 3 59 BLINK Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select one of the following blink modes and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection m OFF Turns off the blinking function of the overlay m Fast Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0 5 second intervals Slow Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1 0 second intervals 3 55 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator 3 56 LOGO Submenu Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the display position of the logo Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The following figure shows the LOGO submenu NOTE To display a logo using the LOGO submenu you need to create a logo file lgo and do
352. ser Manual Operating Basics UTILITY Submenu Use this menu to set the system related settings such as the contrast of the LCD display and the network parameters Use the up A or down F arrow button to scroll through the menu items The following figure shows the UTILITY submenu NOTE When the GPI is enabled the NETWORK menu item is replaced by GPI alarm menu items in the UTILITY submenu See page 2 38 ALARM menu Select UTILITY in the main menu TG700 UTILITY VERSION INFO HAV Select the module for which the hardware CPU 0 V2 0 IE version information will be displayed TG700 UTILITY VERSION INFO FW CPU 0 Ver 45 TG700 UTILITY SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN TG700 UTILITY LCD CONTRAST LOW lt lt 17 gt gt HIGH TG 00 UTILITY FRONT PANEL DISABLE Time Out OFF TG 00 UTILITY NETWORK Information TG 00 UTILITY DIAGNOSTICS lt gt Select the module for which the firmware version information will be displayed To SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Submenu 1 D Adjust the display contrast CANCEL OFF 10 Minutes lt gt Minute 30 Minutes 5Minutes 1 Hour ENTER Information To NETWORK INFORMATION Submenu or sag To NETWORK SETUP Submenu CANCEL To DIAGNOSTICS Submenu CANCEL ENTER TG 00 UTILITY CAL OVEN SELECT To CAL OVEN Internal Frequeny Calibration Submenu CANCEL V 1970 186 Figure 2 20 UTILITY submenu TG700 TV Signal Gener
353. serial digital video outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal This allows you to adjust the timing of this module relative to another module or to an external reference such as Genlock or GPS Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu See page 3 181 TIMING Submenu TIMECODE Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu See page 3 182 TIMECODE Submenu VIDEO Enables or disables the individual components of the output serial stream such as YCbCr RGB or XYZ and allows the edge shaping filter to be enabled or disabled on the video Also allows the A V timing mode to be invoked Select this menu item and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu See page 3 184 VIDEO Submenu ANC PAYLOAD Use this menu to define and control the user defined ANC payload insertion Press the ENTER button to access the ANC Payload submenu See page 3 186 ANC PAYLOAD Submenu SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to Enable or Disable the SMPTE 352M Payload Identifier See page 3 193 SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD TRIGGER OUTPUT Allows you to select a line rate frame rate or the module system clock as a trigger for an external instrument such as an oscilloscope See page 3 193 TRIGGER OUTPUT Submenu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb
354. ses the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES W2 15AUG04 IMPORTANT READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT This software is provided under license from Tektronix Inc Retention of this program for more than thirty 30 days or use of the program in any manner constitutes acceptance of the license terms CAREFULLY READ THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT If you cannot agree to the license terms promptly contact the nearest Tektronix Field Office for return assistance TEKTRONIX SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT THE PROGRAM OR PROGRAMS ENCODED OR INCORPORATED WITHIN EQUIPMENT IS FURNISHED SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETENTION OF THE PROGRAM FOR MORE THAN THIRTY DAYS OR USE OF THE PROGRAM IN ANY MANNER WILL BE CONSIDERED ACCEPTANCE OF THE AGREEMENT TERMS IF THESE TERMS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE THE UNUSED PROGRAM AND ANY ACCOM
355. set NOTE If you want to save network parameters to a preset use the Power On Default preset User Default Use this preset to save user specified default settings If you save new instrument settings in this preset a confirmation message appears to prevent overwriting Factory Default Use this preset to reset the mainframe and all of the installed modules to the factory default settings The following settings are not affected by the factory default LCD contrast front panel timeout and network parameters Select PRESET in the main menu TG 00 PRESET RECALL Power On Default TG 00 PRESET SAVE Power On Default TG 00 PRESET RENAME PRESET 1 TG 00 PRESET DELETE PRESET 1 Figure 2 17 PRESET submenu 1 gt Select a preset to recall 1 gt Select a preset number to save instrument settings ENTER 1 gt Select a preset to Edit the preset name rename CANCEL 1 gt Select a preset to delete TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 19 Operating Basics 2 20 RECALL Recalls instrument settings saved in the selected preset Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select a different preset and then press the ENTER button to implement the selection While the preset is loading into the instrument the message Now Loading appears on the display When the loading is complete the message Done Press CANCEL appears Press the CANCEL button S
356. shows the HDLG7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button HDLG x STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59 941 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits A V 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 12 bits 1080 GBR 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 2 2 10 bits HDLG7 x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH 1080 GBR A 4 4 4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr A 4 2 2 12 bits 1080 GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1 gt 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 12 bits 2K GBR 4 4 4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4 4 4 10 bits 2K XYZ 4 4 4 12 bits Vv 1080 YCbCr A 4 4 4 10 bits A Use Y G Channel 50 Flat Field 0 Flat Field 60 Flat Field HDLG x ALPHA CHANNEL DATA lt b gt 10 Flat Fel 70 Flat Field Use Y G Channel 20 Flat Field 80 Flat Field 30 Flat Field 90 Flat Field 40 Flat Field 100 Flat Field HD 1 HDLG x LINK OFFSET HDLG x 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN To LINK OFFSET submenu 1 gt HD Test Signal Projector Test Pattern CANCEL lest Signal HDLG x MOVING PICTURE To MOVING PICTURE submenu CANCEL Figure 3 97 HDLG7 module main menu 3 208 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator STATUS Displays the instrument operating mode output signal format and output sample structure Examples of the STATUS display are shown below for each of the operating modes converter and generator Converter Mode The figure below shows an example STATUS display when the module is in the converter mode
357. silence signal DAR signal 48 kHz CLOCK Outputs a 48 kHz clock signal The clock output level can be set as described below Setting the clock output level Use jumper J452 on the AG7 module to set the output level of the 48 kHz clock signal See Figure 2 4 Install the jumper on pins 3 4 of J452 factory default position to set the clock output level to CMOS compatible Install the jumper on pins 1 2 of J452 to set the clock output level to 1V J Front Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 SILENCE O O O 9 0O O lt 48KHz J452 Figure 2 4 Location of J452 on the AG7 module 2 4 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics AGL7 Module Connectors The AGL7 Analog Genlock module is equipped with six BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 AGL7 module connectors REF Input loopthrough connectors for an external reference signal which can be NTSC PAL black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signals The signal input requires proper external termination CW Internally terminated input connector for CW Continuous Wave signals 1 3 58 4 43 5 and 10 MHz You can configure the CW connector to output a 48 kHz word clock signal See page 2 6 Changing the Input Output configuration BLACK 1 Outputs the selected black burst signal NOTE You cannot output HDTV trilevel sync s
358. space Control the Embedded Audio characteristics frequency amplitude click rate and sampling rate Set the timing offset of the outputs relative to an internal reference signal or an external reference signal Enable or disable the Timecode and set the timecode parameters Enable or disable the discrete components of the video output signal Enable or disable the user defined Ancillary Payload and set the payload structure Enable or disable the SMPTE 352M Payload identifier Set the line frame or clock rate as a trigger for an external instrument such as an oscilloscope Select between a test signal or a black signal for the secondary SIGNAL 2 output View diagnostics operation parameters and CRC error counts from the video input Access output calibration only available when in factory mode Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figures show the HD3G7 module main menu TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Selection by the MODULE button HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b HD3G7 x OUTPUT MODE 1080 59 94p m 3G Level A 1920 x 1080 HD3G7 x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH m RGB 444 12b To SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH submenu HD3G7 x ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y G Channel HD3G7 x 2xHD STREAM CONTENT Test Signal Test Signal d ENT
359. st Black Burst with No Field REF TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the input and output signals relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal Use the up A or down Y arrow button to scroll through the menu The TIMING submenu uses the same menu structure for both input and output signals except for the menu items displayed in the first line The following figure shows the TIMING submenu Select TIMING in the GENLOCK or OUTPUT submenu AGL7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC Burst Vertical 0 Line s AGL7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC Burst Horizontal Coarse 0 0000 msec AGL7 1 GENLOCK TIMING NTSC Burst Horizontal Fine 0 00 nsec 7 Figure 3 8 AGL7 module TIMING submenu lt gt Set the vertical timing in 1 line steps lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps lt gt Set the horizontal timing in 0 1 ns steps Vertical Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to adjust the vertical offset The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 2 See Table 3 3 Horizontal coarse Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format See Table 3 2 See Table 3 3 3 14 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock Module Horizontal fine Use the left lt 4 or right
360. st on the outside of the instrument with a lint free cloth 2 Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened with a 75 Isopropyl alcohol and water solution Do not use abrasive cleaners 3 Clean the monitor screen with a lint free cloth dampened with a 75 Isopropyl alcohol and water solution 2 44 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Modules AG7 Audio Generator Module This section describes the module specific functions of the AG7 Audio Generator module Refer to the following locations for additional information about the module AG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 3 AG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 13 7TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module Product Description The AG7 Audio Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module can output serial digital audio signals that comply with the AES EBU standard The module contains the following features m 8 channels 4 AES EBU audio pairs of serial digital audio outputs with 24 or 20 bits resolution Adjustable frequencies amplitudes and audio clicks
361. ster progressive rate 60p 59 94p or 50p 4 4 4 YCbCr Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 4 4 YCbCr signal by up interpolating the chroma channel data samples This is accomplished by using several incoming data samples before and after the data samples to derive the extra sample point If 10 bit sample structure is selected the alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu If 12 bit is chosen the addition 2 LSB bits are set to zero on the Y and co sited Cb and Cr samples The derived Cb and Cr samples will contain derived LSB bits 4 4 4 RGB Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 4 4 YCbCr as described above Then the signal is color space converted using the inverse linear transform defined in SMPTE 274M If 10 bit sample structure is selected the alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu If 12 bit is chosen the addition 2 bits LSB are computed from the linear transform calculations 4 2 2 YCbCr 12 Bit Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 2 2 YCbCr 12 bits by setting zeros for the additional 2 bits LSB The alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu 4 4 4 XYZ Formats The HDLG7 module converts the input 4 2 2 YCbCr signal to 4 4 4 YCbCr and 4 4 4 RGB as described in the preceding paragraphs Then the RGB si
362. strument is out of service If you have received your GPS7 module already installed in a mainframe you can set the internal frequency after putting the module in its operating environment and allowing it to reach a stable operating condition Information about the Oven Calibration menu is available in the CAL OVEN Submenu section See page 2 29 NOTE Perform the mainframe internal frequency calibration at least once a year to compensate for oscillator drift With software version 5 1 or greater and a GPS7 module installed this calibration can be done while the instrument is in service WARNING Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG700 mainframe Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures Failure to use appropriate precautions can result in injury or death TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Internal frequency calibration Perform the following procedure to set the internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator This adjustment stores the current frequency of the oscillator while it is locked to a GPS signal It is stored for used when the instrument is set to Internal mode This procedure can be done without any disruption to operation and is best performed in the operating environment of the instrument Set seis weet caer He Res eee 10 11 12 13 14 15 Connect the power cord to the TG700 mainfram
363. submenu Status Enables or disables the text overlay Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection X position Sets the horizontal position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the text The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 85 DVG7 Digital Video Generator EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s 1 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select EDIT and then press the ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change 3 Use the up A or down arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5 U
364. submenu Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to scroll through the selections and then press the ENTER button to enable the selected signal The available signals depend on which signal format you selected in the SELECT FORMAT submenu For NTSC NTSC No Setup and PAL signal formats you can select a black burst signal or a color bars signal when Option CB is installed on the BG7 module For the HD SYNC signal format you can select an HDTV trilevel sync signal The following table lists the available signals for each signal format Table 3 13 BG7 module signals for each signal format Format Selectable signals Selectable signals available with Option CB Only NTSC and NTSC Black Burst Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst with 10 Field ID 100 Color Bars 75 Color No Setup Bars SMPTE Color Bars 40 Flat Field Other 1 Other 2 PAL Black Burst Black Burst No Field REF 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars 100 Color Bars Over Red 75 Color Bars Over Red 40 Flat Field Other 1 Other 2 HD SYNC 1080 60i 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 23 98sF 1080 30p 1080 29 97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23 98p 720 60p 720 59 94p 720 50p 1 These signals are available only from the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 connectors 3 68 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual BG7 Black Generator TIMING Submenu Use this submenu to adjust the timing offset of the selected BLACK output relative to the genlock
365. submenu 3 14 ALARM menu 2 38 Analog Genlock See AGL7 Analog Test Generator See ATG7 Analog Video Generator See AVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator See AWVG7 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Antenna Amplification 3 104 Cabling 3 104 Location 3 104 Requirements for GPS7 3 103 System for GPS7 3 103 ATG7 APL submenu 3 22 3 27 BARS connector 2 7 BLACK 1 connector 2 7 BLACK 2 connector 2 7 Bounce submenu 3 27 Factory default settings 3 28 Functional checks 1 17 ID TEXT submenu 3 22 3 24 Main menu 3 21 Operating procedure 3 18 Product description 3 17 Rear panel connectors 2 7 SELECT OUTPUT submenu 3 21 3 22 SELECT SIGNAL submenu 3 23 SIGNAL connector 2 7 STATUS submenu 3 21 TIMING submenu 3 22 3 26 Audio Generator See AG7 Index 1 Index AVG7 Adjusting the SCH phase 3 46 APL submenu 3 37 3 47 Bounce submenu 3 47 CH 1 connector 2 7 CH 2 connector 2 7 CH 3 connector 2 7 CIRCLE submenu 3 43 Factory default settings 3 48 Functional checks 1 19 ID TEXT submenu 3 41 LOGO submenu 3 40 Main menu 3 36 MOVING PICTURE submenu 3 37 3 38 Operating procedure 3 30 OVERLAY submenu 3 37 3 39 Product description 3 29 Rear panel connectors 2 7 TIMING submenu 3 37 3 44 VIDEO submenu 3 37 3 45 AWVG7 CH 1 connector 2 8 CH 2 connector 2 8 CH 3 connector 2 8 CIRCLE submenu 3 59 Factory default settings 3 63 Functional checks
366. synchronized with frame reset signals 2 or 3 unless a GPS7 module is installed When a GPS7 module is installed the frame reset signal 1 synchronization is related to the frame reset signals 2 and 3 through the GPS7 epoch timing You can see which of the three frame reset signals are used by each output of each module by using the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu See page 2 22 FRAME RESET STATUS Submenu Operating Basics Clock Conflict Messages A SD Clock Conflicts The TG700 uses various shared clocks to operate the mainframe and to output test signals from the installed modules In some cases when you change the signal format of a module output the associated SD or HD clock frequency changes to support the new format If you attempt to change the signal format of a module output and if that format change requires a frequency change to the SD or HD clock being used by the output s of any other installed module s a clock conflict occurs since the instrument cannot output both of the requested signal formats simultaneously In this case the TG700 displays a Clock Select message asking whether you want to disable the currently used clock to enable the signal format change you have input Press ENTER to enable the signal format change or press CANCEL to cancel your signal format change After you enable the signal format change you need to change the signal format of the other output s that were using the SD or HD clock that you j
367. t Test signal buttons a a5 D MODULE COLORBAR LINEARITY FLAT FIELD MULTIBURST SWEEP FRONT PANEL ENABLE LJ LJ OU O Lis FORMAT MONITOR PULSEBAR TMNG SDI OTER NTAEF GHH QA GO GO eera at ime IL t E DH 2T gt Figure 3 26 Front panel test signal buttons If your TG700 mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed you can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the AWVG7 module See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the AWVG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set Table 3 10 AWVG7 signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step 5 Step Ramp Shallow Ramp Valid Ramp 1 FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 100 Flat Field 50 Flat Field MULTI BURST Multi Burst Multiburst 1 10 MHz Multiburst 10 20 MHz Multiburst 20 30 MHz SWEEP Sweep 100 Sweep 1 15 MHz 100 Sweep 1 30 MHz MONITOR Monitor 75 Blue Field Convergence 75 Green Field 75 Red Field PULSE BAR Pulse amp Bar 2730 Pulse am
368. t lt 4 or right arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down 7 arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change 30 DROP Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to enable or disable the 30 Drop mode Most applications will prefer drop frame compensation VITC on NTSC but if needed it can be disabled by this menu VITC Use this menu item to insert the same VITC signal on 1 or 2 lines of the vertical interval Select VITC 1 for one line and VITC 2 for the second line Select the VITC output you want to configure and then press the ENTER button to enter the VITC submenu for the selected output See page 3 123 VITC Submenu Use this menu to enable or disable the output of a VITC on the selected line Use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the VITC submenu Select VITC 1 or VITC 2 in the TIMECODE submenu GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 OUTPUT DISABLE A Y GPS7 x BLACK 1 TIMECODE VITC 1 Line number 14 V 1970 220 lt 1 gt Select ENABLE N lt or DISABLE l gt Set the line number Figure 3 60 GPS7 module VITC submenu OUTPUT Use this menu item to enable or disable insertion of a VITC
369. t L gt 100 Hz 600 Hz 2000Hz 6000Hz 20000 Hz 150 Hz 750 Hz 2400 Hz 8000 Hz 200 Hz 800 Hz 3000Hz 9600 Hz 250 Hz 1000Hz 3200Hz 10000 Hz ee 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS OFF 1 sec lt q 2 sec 3 sec 4sec Figure 3 2 AG7 module CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu 3 4 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AG7 Audio Generator Module Frequency Sets the audio signal frequency for the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz When Inactive is selected audio data output is disabled Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Amplitude Sets the audio signal amplitude for the selected audio channel Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to set the value You can set the value from 60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps Audio click Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel The audio tone if any is turned off for an interval around the audio click Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to make the selection The choices are OFF 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec and 4 sec Press the ENTER button to enable the selection Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for
370. t mode 3 149 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Select the Signal Format Select Sample Structure 3 150 and Depth Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows HD3G7 x SELECT FORMAT 3G A m 1080 59 94p d 1970 242 2 Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The dot will appear at the left of the second line to indicate that the format has been selected 3 Press the CANCEL button to exit FORMAT mode There are several sample structures to choose from when the output mode is set to a non fast progressive format Press the down V arrow button to navigate to the sample structure depth selection shown below HD3G7 x SAMPLE STRUCTURE DEPTH mRGB 444 12b d 1970 244 Press the left lt 4 or right gt arrow buttons to scroll through the available sample structures 3G non fast progressive formats 1080 line RGB 444 12b e YCbCr 444 10b RGB 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b RGBA 444 10b e YCbCr 422 12b e YCbCr 444 12b YCbCrA 422 12b Level B mapping only 3G fast progressive format 1080 line YCbCr 422 10b 3G formats 720 line RGB 444 10b YCbCr 444 10b RGBA 444 10b YCbCrA 444 10b 2xHD formats 1080 and 720 line YCbCr 422 10b 2K line formats XYZ 444 12b RGB
371. t signal if the signal is stable for at least 100 consecutive frames Synchronize Once The VITC on the input signal is continuously monitored until a stable signal is received at least 100 consecutive frames At that time the time of day synchronizes once to this reference Synchronize Now The time of day attempts to synchronize with the VITC on the input signal when the ENTER button is pressed A total of ten attempts to synchronize are made After ten attempts no further attempts are made to synchronize regardless if synchronization occurred or failed A stable signal of at least 100 consecutive frames is needed INTERNAL After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your date and time Press the ENTER to confirm the change and set the time Typically this causes a disruption to the syncs so care should be taken to verify the date and time are correct before selecting Internal mode NOTE The time zone offset must be set to maintain the correct relationship between UTC and local time TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 127 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 128 TIME ZONE OFFSET Submenu Use this menu to set the time zone offset for your location in reference to UTC Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the offset value
372. tall your TG700 system and provides an Incoming Inspection procedure The section also describes the mainframe options and how to install modules Operating Basics provides an overview of the front panel controls and rear panel connections TG700 Modules Operation provides operating information about each of the modules that can be added to the TG700 mainframe TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual xvii Preface Related Manuals xviii The following documents are also available for the TG700 The 7G700 TV Signal Generator Platform PC Tools Technical Reference Tektronix part number 077 0138 XX describes how to use the PC tools that are available for the mainframe and related modules The TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference Tektronix part number 077 0137 XX describes the mechanical electrical and environmental specifications for the mainframe and related modules This manual also provides performance verification procedures The 7G700 TV Signal Generator Platform Programmer Manual Tektronix part number 077 0139 XX provides programming information for the mainframe and related modules The 7G700 TV Signal Generator Platform Service Manual Tektronix part number 077 0230 XX describes how to service the TG700 mainframe to the module level circuit boards fuses Specific service information for a module is located in a subsection of the Service manual spec
373. tellites and achieve specified stability with a good satellite signal known position and a warmed up instrument is two minutes GPS Antenna System Antenna systems vary depending on the operating environment and on safety and regulatory requirements A simplified typical system is shown in the following figure to help you with planning and understanding the trade offs of one set up versus another See Figure 3 53 Optional Antenna with amplifier Cable 1 Cable 2 Voy Figure 3 53 Simplified antenna system 1970 219 A GPS specific antenna with amplifier provides sufficient gain to drive a reasonable length of cable and provides filtering to reject signals at other frequencies A typical example of this is the Trimble Bullet II 35 dB 5 V antenna TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 103 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module 3 104 In a simple system without the optional booster Cable 1 connects the antenna to the GPS7 The length of this cable is limited by its attenuation at the GPS carrier frequency of 1575 MHz The GPS7 should have a signal that is 18 dB or greater above the ambient level For example for a 35 dB antenna the allowed cable loss is 35 18 17 dB See Figure 3 53 Cables Attenuation varies significantly depending on cable type Cable loss is about 13 dB 100 ft for a miniature coaxial cable like the Belden 1855 while for a RG11 style like the Belden 773
374. ternal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 3 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced VOLTAGE MON 4 This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies If these supplies are outside the nominal range a warning appears which means that the instrument should be serviced This menu is accessible only when the instrument is in factory mode From this menu you can access several special output signals and adjust the serial output levels The special signals are unscrambled and are synchronous with the clock out of the trigger BNC They are used to check performance or used when adjusting serial levels See the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform Service Manual for information on adjustments and using factory mode TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Factory Default Settings HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator The following table shows the factory default settings for the HD3G7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 35 HD3G7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings TEST SIGNAL 100 Color Bars FORMAT 1080 59 94
375. tform User Manual AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator CH3 Turns the CH 3 signal output on or off Use the left lt 4 or right P arrow button to select between ON and OFF Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection The signal name that is displayed before the ON OFF status depends on the format of the currently selected signal YPbPr component or GBR component Factory Default Settings The following table shows the factory default settings for the AWVG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 12 AWVG7 module factory default settings Menu item name Settings STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100 Color Bars MOVING PICTURE H Step 0 Sample s V Step 0 Line s Period 1 Frame s Random Disable OVERLAY OBJECT Logo OVERLAY BLINK OFF OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF OVERLAY ID TEXT Status Disable OVERLAY CIRCLE Status Disable X Position 0 0 APH Y Position 0 0 APH Diameter 90 0 APH TIMING Vertical 0 Line s Horizontal Coarse 0 000 ms Horizontal Fine 0 00 ns VIDEO GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels Y ON Pb ON Pr ON TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 63 BG7 Black Generator BG7 Black Generator This section describes the module specific functions of the BG7 Black Generator module Refer to the following locations for additi
376. that no error messages appear on the display 3 After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 module main menu appears as shown below HD3G7 x STATUS 75 Color Bars 1 3G A 1080 59 94p YCbCr 422 10b 1970 257 5 Select the frame rate using the FORMAT button or select the test signal using the test signal front panel buttons such as COLOR BARS or LINEARITY To learn how to set the instrument to convertor mode refer to the following page See page 3 146 Selecting an Output Signal 6 Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus For example when the OUTPUT MODE menu is displayed pressing the left lt 4 or right arrow button allows you to select between output modes such as Level A Level B HD etc Refer to HD3G7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 170 NOTE In addition to the factory installed signal sets there are enhanced signal sets available for the HD3G7 module These signal sets are located on the TG700 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your instrument See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 145 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Selecting an Output Signal Select the Gene
377. the REF connector NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID Burst locks to an NTSC black burst with 10 Field ID signal applied to the REF connector PAL Burst Burst locks to a PAL black burst signal applied to the REF connector m 525 SYNC Sync locks to an NTSC black burst signal applied to the REF connector 3 10 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual AGL7 Analog Genlock Module m 625 SYNC Sync locks to a PAL black burst signal applied to the REF connector HD SYNC Locks to an HDTV trilevel signal applied to the REF connector m CW Locks to the 1 3 58 4 43 5 or 10 MHz continuous wave signal applied to the CW connector TIMING Adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal When you select this menu item and press the ENTER button you will access the TIMING submenu See page 3 14 LOCK LOSS ACTION Sets the way the AGL7 module reacts when a loss of genlock state occurs for example genlock source is absent or incompatible Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select the action and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Select from the following actions Go Internal Frequency Switches automatically to the internal reference and blinks the EXT REF indicator m Stay Current Frequency Maintains the current state FRAME RESET CW Selects the frame reset signal frequency to be used when a CW signal is applied to the CW c
378. the Audio Click rate When Audio Click is valid Audio Tone is turned off for 0 25 seconds around the click For example if you select 3 sec for the click rate the audio tone will be output for 2 75 seconds and silent for 0 25 seconds the click occurs during this silence When Audio Click is OFF the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu is output continuously Audio Click makes it easy to identify any of the four output channels AUDIO TIMING Submenu Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the internal reference signal frame reset signal The following figure shows the AUDIO TIMING submenu G7 x AUDIO TIMING A Shee 2 lt q gt 160 ms to 160 ms Figure 3 3 AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 160 ms to 160 ms in 1 ms steps A minus timing value is set as Delay and plus is set as Advance NOTE You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left 4 or right gt arrow buttons simultaneously TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 5 AG7 Audio Generator Module Factory Default Settings 3 6 The following table shows the factory default settings for the AG7 module These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu Table 3 1 AG7 module factory default settings
379. the PC s address except for the last number The last number must be different than the last number in the PC s IP address b Set the SUBNET MASK parameter to be the same net mask subnet mask used by the PC Do not enter a number if the PC does not have a net mask c You do not need to entera BRDCAST ADDR and GATEWAY ADDR if you are directly connected to a single PC 2 Ifyou connect the TG700 to your local Ethernet network see the Caution note below CAUTION To prevent communication conflicts on your Ethernet network ask your local network administrator for the correct numbers to enter in the NETWORK PARAMETERS submenu if you connect the TG700 to your local Ethernet network 3 Verify the Ethernet connection by using a ping command from the PC TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics Using the Mainframe General Purpose Interface GPI You can use the 10 BASE T port of the TG700 mainframe as a General Purpose Interface GPI by changing internal jumper settings When you enable the mainframe GPI you can recall one of the seven available presets output an alarm signal and display an alarm status on the LCD This section describes how to set the mainframe GPI and its available features IN WARNING Electrical shock can cause injury or death Reduce the risk of shock by referring to the General Safety Summary and the Service Safety Summary before performing any service level adjustments O
380. the following locations for additional information about this module HD3G7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 12 HD3G7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 33 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 143 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Product Description The HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module can be operated in either of the following two modes Generator The module can output 3 Gb s SDI and 1 5 Gb s HD SDI video test signals in a variety of formats including both Level A and Level B mapping structures for 3G SDI signals See page 3 146 Select the Generator Mode Converter The module can convert a number of HD SDI input signal formats to a variety of 3G SDI output signal formats with up to 32 channels embedded digital audio and ancillary data copied from input signal to output signal See page 3 148 Select the Converter Mode The module provides the following features 3 144 Two serial digital outputs for 1 5 Gb s and 3 Gb s signals
381. the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal output Option CB enables this connector to also output a 10 field ID or color bars signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics DVG7 Module Connectors The standard DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is equipped with two BNC connectors to output serial digital video signals Option BK adds two additional BNC connectors to output serial digital black signals See Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 DVG7 module connectors Option BK SIGNAL 1 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal SIGNAL 2 Outputs the selected serial digital video signal BLACK 1 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only BLACK 2 Outputs the selected serial digital black signal Option BK only NOTE The SIGNAL I and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal and the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors output the same black signal TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 2 9 Operating Basics GPS7 Module Connectors The GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module is equipped with four BNC connectors and one 15 pin D sub connector as described below See Figure 2 12 Foc ANTENNA LTC GPI MK BLACK 3 10MHz BLACK 2 BLACK 1 REF IN 1970 180 Figure 2 12 GPS7 module connectors ANTENNA Input connector for a GPS antenna The antenna input must meet specific requirements See page 3 103
382. the signal set Description LINEARITY 5 Step Staircase Series of vertical bars of equal steps on all three channels These 10 Step Staircase patterns are color independent so they will appear differently in YCbCr RGB or XYZ color spaces Since the range of valid levels is not evenly divisible by 5 or 10 steps the first and last bars slightly exceed the valid range but are still well within legal limits For example the valid range for 10 bit YCbCr formats is from 64 940 for the Y channel 876 steps and from 64 960 for the Cb Cr channels 896 steps Therefore the level of the first bar is 62 and the level of the last bar is 942 962 which results in equal step sizes across the pattern Valid Ramp The Valid Ramp is a matrix of three different ramps designed Y Valid Ramp to test the video component channels for YCbCr and for gamut B Y Valid Ramp range testing in all color spaces These three ramps are also R Y Valid Ramp available as individual patterns that span the picture width First the Y Valid Ramp spans from black to white across the valid range of the luminance Y channel Next the B Y Valid Ramp spans from yellow to cyan across the valid range of the Cb color difference channel Last the R Y Valid Ramp spans from cyan to red across the valid range of the Cr color difference channel 3 Channel Ramp Wide ramp from the lower valid value to the upper valid value for all three channels This pattern is color independent
383. tion FLAT FIELD 0 Flat Field Black Full frame monochrome flat fields The factory installed patterns 50 Flat Field include 0 black 50 and 100 white 100 Flat Field White You can install extended signal sets which include additional patterns for the remaining 10 increments See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets 100 Red Field 100 Green Field 100 Full frame color flat fields The factory installed patterns include Blue Field 100 Cyan Field each of six colors red green blue cyan magenta and yellow 100 Magenta Field 100 Yellow Field at 100 value You can install enhanced signal sets which include additional patterns for these six colors at 75 value See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets 10 Flat Field 20 Flat Field Full frame monochrome flat fields available in individual patterns 30 Flat Field 40 Flat Field from 10 to 90 in 10 increments ane Flat Field r0 Flat Field These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets You 80 Flat Field 90 Flat Field must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals See page 3 156 Install the Enhanced Signal Sets 75 Red Field 75 Green Field Full frame color flat fields available in individual patterns of 75 75 Blue Field 75 Cyan Field value for each of six colors red green blue cyan magenta and 75 Magenta Field 75 Yellow Field yellow These signals are not part of the factory installed signal set
384. tion process for all installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 5 Press the front panel MODULE button until the BG7 main menu shown below appears WwW D gt a oo BG7 x SELECT OUTPUT 6 Press the front panel ENTER button The SELECT FORMAT submenu shown below appears BG x BLACK 1 SELECT FORMAT NTS 7 8 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select NTSC or PAL Press the ENTER button The SELECT SIGNAL submenu shown below appears BG7 x BLACK 1 SELECT SIGNAL Black Burst gt Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select Black Burst and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection Connect the BLACK 1 connector to the NTSC PAL waveform monitor using the 75 Q BNC cable Set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed Press the front panel CANCEL button to return to the SELECT FORMAT submenu shown in step 6 Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select HD SYNC Press the ENTER button The SELECT SIGNAL submenu shown in step 8 displays to select the HDTV trilevel sync signal Press the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select 1080 59 94i and then press the ENTER button to enable the selection Disconnect the BNC cable from the NTSC PAL wavefo
385. tive upon acceptance by Customer and shall remain in effect until terminated as provided herein The license may be terminated by Customer at any time upon written notice to Tektronix The license may be terminated by Tektronix or any third party from whom Tektronix may have obtained a respective licensing right if Customer fails to comply with any term or condition and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice hereof from Tektronix or such third party Upon termination by either party Customer shall return to Tektronix or destroy the Program and all associated documentation together with all copies in any form LIMITED WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the media on which the Program is furnished and the encoding of the Program on the media will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three 3 months from the date of shipment If any such medium or encoding proves defective during the warranty period Tektronix will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective medium Except as to the media on which the Program is furnished the Program is provided as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied Tektronix does not warrant that the functions contained in the Program will meet Customer s requirements or that the operation of the Program will be uninterrupted or error free In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the
386. to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for you offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change The following figure shows the TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu Select TIME ZONE OFFSET menu in the main menu ENTER gt a n TIME SETUP TIME ZONE OFFSET e Eika 5 J 4970 211 Figure 3 63 GPS7 module TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu NOTE When the DST event occurs the scheduled offset will be added to the time zone offset and the DST schedule will be cleared This allows for a new schedule to be set up for any time in the future TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module DST SCHEDULE Submenu Use this menu to schedule when Daylight Savings Time changes are implemented Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the DST SCHEDULE submenu Select DST SCHEDULE menu in the main menu GPS7 x TIME SETUP DST SCH ENABLE OFF GPS7 x TIME SETUP DST SCH SETUP Schedule Time 2008 01 01 01 00 00 J 1970 212 gt ae lt 1 gt gt Edit time ON OFF gt GPS7 x TIME SETUP DST SCH OFFSET ENTER f 1 gt Edit offset 00 00 qP lt Fig
387. to the AC power source Connecting the power cable causes the instrument to power on After connecting the power make sure that the fan on the rear panel is working If the fan is not working turn off the power by disconnecting the power cable from the AC power source and then contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started Module Installation and Removal The following procedures describe how to install and remove modules from the TG700 mainframe A screwdriver with a 1 Phillips tip is the only tool you need to install or remove a module CAUTION To prevent damage to the mainframe and module always remove the power cord before installing or removing a module Preventing Component Damage CAUTION Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage components on the module and mainframe To prevent ESD or other component damage follow the guidelines below when installing removing or handling a module m Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the static voltage from your body while installing or removing modules from the TG700 mainframe Transport and store modules in a static protected bag or container Do not slide the module over any surface m Handle modules as little as possible Do not touch module components or connector pins Do not use any devices capable of generating or holding a static charge in the work area wher
388. tomatically follows the format of the Black 1 signal Rear Panel gt ni on a O Coy 7 O0 0 O Q m a cj Figure 2 6 Location of J040 and J960 on the AGL7 module 2 6 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics ATG7 Module Connectors The ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is equipped with four BNC connectors as described below See Figure 2 7 BLACK2 Figure 2 7 ATG7 module connectors BLACK 1 Outputs the selected black burst timing pulse or subcarrier signal BLACK 2 Outputs the selected black burst timing pulse or subcarrier signal SIGNAL Outputs the signal selected using the front panel test signal buttons See Table 3 5 on page 3 20 BARS Outputs the selected black burst or color bars signal AVG7 Module Connectors The AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is equipped with three pairs of BNC connectors as described below See Figur
389. ts the following audio frequencies Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz 50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz 100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz 150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz 200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz 250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz 300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz After the module is installed in the mainframe and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used use the following procedure to access each function of the module 1 9 o Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel and then plug the cord into the AC electric power source Electric power is supplied to the mainframe Wait until the power on initialization process is complete and then check that no error messages appear on the display After the initialization process is complete the mainframe main menu appears as shown below TG700 PRESET 4 Press the front panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 module main menu appears as shown below HDVG7 x STATUS 1080 59 94 100 Color Bars wm oa Select the signal format and the test signal you want to output See page 3 215 Selecting an Output Signal Use the front panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus Refer to HDVG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items See page 3 217 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital
390. tus Enables or disables the generation of embedded audio for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Enable and Disable Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Channel Selects the audio channel for which you will change the parameters Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select 1 2 3 or 4 Select any audio channel and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO CHANNEL submenu See page 3 89 3 88 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual DVG7 Digital Video Generator Emphasis Sets the emphasis status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to select NO EMPHASIS CD or CCITT Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Sampling Sets the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select Frame Frame without Frame Number or Asynchronous Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection Resolution Sets the resolution of the audio signal data for the selected audio group Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between 24 bits and 20 bits Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection AUDIO CHANNEL Use this menu to set the frequency amplitude and audio click of the embedded Submenu audio signal for the selected audio channel Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the menu The follow
391. u for detailed information about the main menu and the submenu items See page 3 21 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ATG7 Analog Test Generator Selecting an Output Signal The SIGNAL connector on the ATG7 module provides the capability to output test signals assigned to the front panel test signal buttons To output a signal from the connector you need to select a signal format and an output signal as described below Select the Signal Format Perform the following steps to select the signal format 1 Ifthe ATG7 module menu is not displayed press the front panel MODULE button until the ATG7 module main menu appears as shown below ATG7 x STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars 2 Press the FORMAT button The menu display changes as follows ATG x SELECT FORMAT NTSC Current 3 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the FORMAT button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection NOTE When you change the signal format synchronization shock occurs Select the Test Signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons When the ATG7 module is selected and you press any of the front panel test signal buttons the selected signal in the signal set is output on the SIGNAL connector See Figure 3 9 For example when you press the COLOR BAR test signal butt
392. ue is 700 mV TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s SDI Video Generator Kx Parameter Display name KX H Freq Units cycles active picture height c aph Kx denotes the initial constant horizontal frequency of the pattern To see the effects of changing this coefficient set a waveform monitor to view the video lines Note that the units are cycles per active picture height The number of cycles in a line will depend on the width to height aspect ratio of the active format For example Kx 9 0 will result in approximately 12 cycles per line ina format with a 4 3 aspect ratio the same setting will yield about 16 cycles per line when the ratio is 16 9 To estimate the equivalent absolute frequency of the sine wave i e to convert from c aph to c s or Hz use the formula fea x Kx x Rrav x Raspect x Nines x F frame where Raspect the aspect ratio width height Niines the number of lines per frame frame the frame rate Riav the ratio of line length to the length of the active video The maximum frequency is half of the active format s sampling frequency In formats that use a 74 25 MHz clock for example the maximum value of KX will correspond to a sine frequency of 37 1 MHz The Horizontal Sine zone plate for example is a Kx only zone plate See Figure 3 77 Figure 3 77 A K only zone plate TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 163 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb s
393. ure 3 64 GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu ENABLE Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to turn ON or OFF the DST schedule function OFFSET Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the DST offset value to change An underline character appears under the selected offset digit The date and time digits take the following form HH MM After you select an offset digit use the up 4 or down 7 arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your offset Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 129 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module PROGRAM TIME Submenu 3 130 SETUP Press the ENTER button and then use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select a digit in the DST setup value to change An underline character appears under the selected digit The date and time digits take the following form YYYY MM DD HH MM SS After you select a digit use the up A or down arrow button to change the value of the digit Repeat for each digit as required for your date and time Press the ENTER to confirm the change NOTE When the DST event occurs the scheduled offset will be added to the time zone offset and the DST schedule will be cleared This allows for a new schedule to be set up for any time in the future NOTE VITC may have DST sh
394. ust changed CAUTION If you disable a clock that is being used by another signal output the timing of the other signal output will no longer conform to its configured format Examples of specific conditions under which the clock conflict message is displayed are described below If your DVG7 module has Option BK installed an SD clock conflict message will appear if you attempt to output 525 143 format signals and 525 270 or 625 270 format signals simultaneously from the module For example if you attempt set the signal format for the BLACK outputs to 525 143 when the signal format for the SIGNAL outputs is currently set to 525 270 the following message appears DVG Clock Select Disable 270 MHz j Yes ENTER No CANCEL 4 This message asks if you want to disable the 270 MHz clock that is currently in use by the SIGNAL outputs Press the CANCEL button to cancel the new format setting or press the ENTER button to enable the clock and signal format change If you enable the clock change you will then need to change the signal format for the SIGNAL outputs that were using the clock you disabled This message will not appear if you have two DVG7 modules installed and simultaneously output 525 143 format signals from one DVG7 module and 525 270 or 625 270 format signals from the other DVG7 module TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Operating Basics HD Clock Conflicts An HD clock conflict message will ap
395. uttons 3 204 Table 3 38 HDLG7 module projector test pattern set assigned to the test signal buttons 3 205 Table 3 39 HDLG7 module sample structure depth signal formats 0cccceeeee eee eeeees 3 209 Table 3 40 HDLG7 module factory default settingS 0 cece cece ence eee e eee ee teens eneeenaes 3 212 Table 3 41 HDVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons ceeeeeeees 3 216 Table 3 42 HDVG7 module factory default settings 0 cece cece ence eee e eee nee eeaeeneeenaes 3 233 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual ix General Safety Summary General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Use proper power cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Ground the product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe all terminal ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings
396. value from 0 0 to 100 0 in 1 steps TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual 3 223 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator 3 224 EDIT Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal Perform the following steps to edit the text NOTE You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text Use the blank character to erase unneeded character s i U ENTER button to enable the text edit mode 2 U 3 U se the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select EDIT and then press the se the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to move the underscore character _ to the character you want to change se the up A or down arrow button to select the desired character 4 After you enter all of the desired characters press the ENTER button to exit the text editing mode 5 Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select SAVE and then press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file SAVE Press Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator CIRCLE Submenu Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set the display position of the circle Use the up A or down arrow button to change the menu items The following figure shows the C
397. video signal up down left right or randomly Use the up 4 or down Y arrow button to scroll the menu The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu Select MOVING PICTURE in the main menu DVG x MOVING PICTURE zj gt H Step 0 Sample s Set the number of samples to be scrolled DVG7 x MOVING PICTURE V Step 0 Line s gt Set the number of lines to be scrolled DVG x MOVING PICTURE A D gt Set the period in frames to be scrolled Period 1 Frame s DVG x MOVING PICTURE Disable Random Disable 1 gt Enable v Figure 3 43 DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu H step Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 4 sample steps V step Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu item Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 252 to 252 in 1 line steps Period Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling Use the left lt or right gt arrow button to change the value You can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps Random Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to select between Disable and Enable Press the ENTER button to confirm the
398. wer source The initialization of all the installed modules is executed 3 Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display 4 Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes 1 24 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual Getting Started 5 Run the GPS7 module diagnostics a Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears b Use the up A or down V arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS c Press the ENTER button d Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to scroll through the menu Take note of any errors or warnings 6 Load the factory preset a Press the MODULE button until TG700 appears b Press ENTER to select Preset c Ifneeded use the up A or down arrow button to select Recall d Press the left lt 4 arrow button until Factory Preset appears e Press the ENTER button to load the preset 7 When loading is complete press the CANCEL button to exit the Factory Default menu DC antenna output power voltage Connect the BNC to Banana plug adapter to the voltmeter Connect the BNC T to the adapter Connect a 75 Q BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector Eee N e Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the module 5 Set the antenna power to 3 3 V a Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module b Use the up A or down arrow button to select GPS SETUP c Press the ENTER button d Use the up A or down arrow button to sel
399. will have been attenuated too far and the output may be noisy If you cannot put the optional booster amplifier in the middle of a long run of cable then put it near the antenna rather than near the GPS7 end For more complex systems a variety of booster amplifiers powered and passive splitters DC blocks and filters are available from a number of vendors Antenna location It is important that the GPS antenna location has a clear view of a large part of the sky Since GPS satellites are constantly orbiting the earth they may be in any direction at a given time If part of the sky is blocked by buildings trees mountains etc then fewer satellites will be visible It is also possible to get reflected signals that will have come by a longer path than expected and thus may degrade timing accuracy and stability When evaluating a site it is important to monitor it over several days and with a variety of weather conditions present TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module This antenna information is not intended to cover all aspects of the antenna system design Important topics that were not covered include items like lightening protection and drip loops For information about the cable plant design in your system contact the appropriate person or group in your organization or contract with a qualified installer Figures of Merit FOM These numbers are a compendium of the GPS signal qu
400. wing locations for additional information about this module ATG7 Module Connectors for a description of the rear panel connectors See page 2 7 ATG7 Module Functional Check for a basic procedure to check that the module is functional See page 1 17 TG700 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module is functioning as specified 1G700 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to remotely control the module Product Description The ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform The module is an analog test signal generator that provides NTSC PAL analog composite signals The ATG7 module provides the following features SIGNAL output connector which outputs test signals selected from the front panel test signal buttons You can overlay ID text on this video signal output BARS output connector which outputs NTSC with or without setup and PAL color bars signals black burst signals and other video test signals You can overlay ID text on this video signal output BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 output connectors which output NTSC with or without setup and PAL black burst signals composite sync and composite blanking signals NTSC with or without setup and PAL subcarrier signals H V drive signals and other video signals Individual format and ti
401. without REF IN do not support Genlock Menus illustrated in this manual represent the newest features GPS7 modules without the REF IN input have similar menu structures but not identical menu content 3 112 TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode Module Use the up A or down arrow button to scroll through the main menu The following figure shows the GPS7 module main menu Selection by the MODULE button Antenna lt status gt Gnik Sig Amp lt status gt VITC lt line gt REF IN GPS7 x STATUS ref source No Sig I gt L e meur Sahe ony Antenna Power OFF GPS Signal Quality 0 0 Sats 0 0 A GPS 1999 08 22 0 00 00 00 UTC A A GPS 1999 08 22 0 00 00 00 Local ENTER GPS7 x REFERENCE To REFERENCE i ae CANCEL V V V ENTER GPS7 x SELECT OUTPUT j BLACK 1 To BLACK BLACK 1 BLACK 2 submenu A ENTER GPS7 x GPS SETUP To GPS SETUP CANCEL A V TIME OF DAY menu TIME ZONE OFFSET menu DST SCHEDULE menu ENTER GPS7 x TIME SETUP SELECT MENU lt gt PROGRAM TIME menu To selected submenu TIME OF DAY menu JAM SYNC menu LEAP SECOND menu CANCEL ALARM TIME menu ALARM DELAY menu LTC 1 ENTER GPS7 x SELECT LTC lt gt LTC 2 To selected submenu LTC 1 LTC 3 LTC 4 CANCEL INPUT 1 ENTER GPS 7 x SELECT GPIO lt b gt OUTPUT 1 To selected submenu OUTPUT 2 CANCEL A V ENTER GPS7 x DIAGNOSTICS T
402. wnload it to the LOGO folder of the module Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG700 Select Logo in the OVERLAY submenu AWVG7 X Po x OVERLAY LOGO sition 0 0 APH lt gt Set the horizontal position AWVG7 Y Po x OVERLAY LOGO sition 0 0 APH lt gt Set the vertical position AVWG7 x OVERLAY LOGO Logo OFF AVWG7 x OVERLAY LOGO SAVE Press ENTER to save parameters Figure 3 30 AWVG7 module LOGO submenu gt Select OFF or a logo Save the display position for the logo X position Sets the horizontal position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture width Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Y position Sets the vertical position of the logo The position is set as a percentage of active picture height Use the left lt 4 or right arrow button to change the position You can set the value from 100 0 to 0 0 in 0 1 steps Logo Selects the logo you want to display Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button to select OFF or a logo file name Press the ENTER button confirm the selection When you select OFF the logo overlay is disabled SAVE Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file Press the ENTE
403. you press the COLOR BAR test signal button a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output Use the left lt 4 or right gt arrow button or press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set Test signal buttons A a N MODULE COLOREAR LINEARITY FLATFELD MULTIBURST SWEEP FRONT PANEL ENABLE LJ C EJ GO G FORMAT MONITOR PULSEBAR TMNG SDI OTER NT AEF HQ ch ie 4 exe at 21 IL Jr DHA aT gt Figure 3 100 Front panel test signal buttons If your TG700 mainframe has 64 MB of memory installed you can download a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the mainframe and output the picture from the HDVG7 module See page 1 2 Mainframe Memory Requirements Refer to the TG700 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create download and output a frame picture The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set Table 3 41 HDVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set COLOR BAR Color Bars 100 Color Bars 75 Color Bars SMPTE Color Bars LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Staircase Limit Ramp Ramp Shallow Ramp Matrix Shallow Ramp Valid Ramp FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0 Flat Field 50

TG700 TV Signal Generator Platform User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents